Bram Moolenaar | 5dc6252 | 2012-02-13 00:05:22 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1 | *syntax.txt* For Vim version 7.3. Last change: 2012 Feb 11 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2 | |
| 3 | |
| 4 | VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar |
| 5 | |
| 6 | |
| 7 | Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring* |
| 8 | |
| 9 | Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or |
| 10 | color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim |
| 11 | doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its |
| 12 | limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody |
| 13 | calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that. |
| 14 | |
| 15 | Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary |
| 16 | terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the |
| 17 | GUI version, gvim. |
| 18 | |
| 19 | In the User Manual: |
| 20 | |usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting. |
| 21 | |usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file. |
| 22 | |
| 23 | 1. Quick start |:syn-qstart| |
| 24 | 2. Syntax files |:syn-files| |
| 25 | 3. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading| |
| 26 | 4. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks| |
| 27 | 5. Defining a syntax |:syn-define| |
| 28 | 6. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments| |
| 29 | 7. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern| |
| 30 | 8. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster| |
| 31 | 9. Including syntax files |:syn-include| |
| 32 | 10. Synchronizing |:syn-sync| |
| 33 | 11. Listing syntax items |:syntax| |
| 34 | 12. Highlight command |:highlight| |
| 35 | 13. Linking groups |:highlight-link| |
| 36 | 14. Cleaning up |:syn-clear| |
| 37 | 15. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight| |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 38 | 16. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax| |
| 39 | 17. Color xterms |xterm-color| |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 40 | |
| 41 | {Vi does not have any of these commands} |
| 42 | |
| 43 | Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been |
| 44 | disabled at compile time. |
| 45 | |
| 46 | ============================================================================== |
| 47 | 1. Quick start *:syn-qstart* |
| 48 | |
| 49 | *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable* |
| 50 | This command switches on syntax highlighting: > |
| 51 | |
| 52 | :syntax enable |
| 53 | |
| 54 | What this command actually does is to execute the command > |
| 55 | :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 56 | |
| 57 | If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find |
| 58 | the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just |
| 59 | fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the |
| 60 | directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files |
| 61 | are in the "/usr/vim/vim50/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to |
| 62 | "/usr/vim/vim50". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim. |
| 63 | |
| 64 | *:syn-on* *:syntax-on* |
| 65 | The ":syntax enable" command will keep your current color settings. This |
| 66 | allows using ":highlight" commands to set your preferred colors before or |
| 67 | after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the |
| 68 | defaults, use: > |
| 69 | :syntax on |
| 70 | < |
| 71 | *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal* |
| 72 | If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background |
| 73 | with: > |
| 74 | :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White |
| 75 | For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|. |
| 76 | For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|. |
| 77 | |
| 78 | NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>. |
| 79 | The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of |
| 80 | file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is |
| 81 | automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty. |
| 82 | |
| 83 | NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value |
| 84 | of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 85 | reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 86 | used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 87 | highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 88 | |
| 89 | :gui " open window and set default for 'background' |
| 90 | :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors |
| 91 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 92 | NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 93 | foreground! Use ":gui -f" then. |
| 94 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 0909215 | 2010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 95 | *g:syntax_on* |
| 96 | You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: > |
| 97 | :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 98 | |
| 99 | To put this into a mapping, you can use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 0909215 | 2010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 100 | :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar> |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 101 | \ syntax off <Bar> |
| 102 | \ else <Bar> |
| 103 | \ syntax enable <Bar> |
| 104 | \ endif <CR> |
| 105 | [using the |<>| notation, type this literally] |
| 106 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 107 | Details: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 108 | The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how |
| 109 | this works, look in the file: |
| 110 | command file ~ |
| 111 | :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 112 | :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 113 | :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim |
| 114 | :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 115 | Also see |syntax-loading|. |
| 116 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 117 | NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting |
| 118 | makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value. |
| 119 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 120 | ============================================================================== |
| 121 | 2. Syntax files *:syn-files* |
| 122 | |
| 123 | The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in |
| 124 | a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the |
| 125 | name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters, |
| 126 | a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem). |
| 127 | Examples: |
| 128 | c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim |
| 129 | cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim |
| 130 | |
| 131 | The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But |
| 132 | the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a |
| 133 | language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one, |
| 134 | for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: > |
| 135 | :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim |
| 136 | |
| 137 | The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: > |
| 138 | :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim |
| 139 | :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim |
| 140 | These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim. |
| 141 | |
| 142 | |
| 143 | MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile* |
| 144 | |
| 145 | When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these |
| 146 | automatically with ":syntax enable", do this: |
| 147 | |
| 148 | 1. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item |
| 149 | of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: > |
| 150 | mkdir ~/.vim |
| 151 | |
| 152 | 2. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: > |
| 153 | mkdir ~/.vim/syntax |
| 154 | |
| 155 | 3. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write |
| 156 | it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: > |
| 157 | :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim |
| 158 | |
| 159 | Now you can start using your syntax file manually: > |
| 160 | :set syntax=mine |
| 161 | You don't have to exit Vim to use this. |
| 162 | |
| 163 | If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|. |
| 164 | |
| 165 | If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user |
| 166 | to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'. |
| 167 | |
| 168 | |
| 169 | ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add* |
| 170 | |
| 171 | If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to |
| 172 | add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps: |
| 173 | |
| 174 | 1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above. |
| 175 | |
| 176 | 2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: > |
| 177 | mkdir ~/.vim/after |
| 178 | mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax |
| 179 | |
| 180 | 3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For |
| 181 | example, to change the colors for the C syntax: > |
| 182 | highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green |
| 183 | |
| 184 | 4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the |
| 185 | syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: > |
| 186 | :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim |
| 187 | |
| 188 | That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be |
| 189 | different. You don't even have to restart Vim. |
| 190 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 5313dcb | 2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 191 | If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name. |
| 192 | All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example: |
| 193 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim |
| 194 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim |
| 195 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 196 | |
| 197 | REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace* |
| 198 | |
| 199 | If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new |
| 200 | version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure |
| 201 | that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. |
| 202 | Vim will only load the first syntax file found. |
| 203 | |
| 204 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 205 | NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* |
| 206 | |
| 207 | A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of |
| 208 | thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color. |
| 209 | A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself. |
| 210 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 211 | The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits |
| 212 | and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*" |
| 213 | |
| 214 | To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must |
| 215 | be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages. |
| 216 | These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly |
| 217 | you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"): |
| 218 | |
| 219 | *Comment any comment |
| 220 | |
| 221 | *Constant any constant |
| 222 | String a string constant: "this is a string" |
| 223 | Character a character constant: 'c', '\n' |
| 224 | Number a number constant: 234, 0xff |
| 225 | Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false |
| 226 | Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10 |
| 227 | |
| 228 | *Identifier any variable name |
| 229 | Function function name (also: methods for classes) |
| 230 | |
| 231 | *Statement any statement |
| 232 | Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc. |
| 233 | Repeat for, do, while, etc. |
| 234 | Label case, default, etc. |
| 235 | Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc. |
| 236 | Keyword any other keyword |
| 237 | Exception try, catch, throw |
| 238 | |
| 239 | *PreProc generic Preprocessor |
| 240 | Include preprocessor #include |
| 241 | Define preprocessor #define |
| 242 | Macro same as Define |
| 243 | PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc. |
| 244 | |
| 245 | *Type int, long, char, etc. |
| 246 | StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc. |
| 247 | Structure struct, union, enum, etc. |
| 248 | Typedef A typedef |
| 249 | |
| 250 | *Special any special symbol |
| 251 | SpecialChar special character in a constant |
| 252 | Tag you can use CTRL-] on this |
| 253 | Delimiter character that needs attention |
| 254 | SpecialComment special things inside a comment |
| 255 | Debug debugging statements |
| 256 | |
| 257 | *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links |
| 258 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 4f99eae | 2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 259 | *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore| |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 260 | |
| 261 | *Error any erroneous construct |
| 262 | |
| 263 | *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the |
| 264 | keywords TODO FIXME and XXX |
| 265 | |
| 266 | The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups. |
| 267 | For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting. |
| 268 | The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same |
| 269 | highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands |
| 270 | after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file. |
| 271 | |
| 272 | Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string" |
| 273 | can be used for the same group. |
| 274 | |
| 275 | The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name: |
| 276 | NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained |
| 277 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 4f99eae | 2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 278 | *hl-Ignore* |
| 279 | When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal |
| 280 | mechanism. See |conceal|. |
| 281 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 282 | ============================================================================== |
| 283 | 3. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading* |
| 284 | |
| 285 | This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is |
| 286 | issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are |
| 287 | located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|. |
| 288 | |
| 289 | ":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following: |
| 290 | |
| 291 | Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 292 | | |
| 293 | +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 294 | | |
| 295 | +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath' |
| 296 | | | |
| 297 | | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is |
| 298 | | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise |
| 299 | | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules |
| 300 | | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't |
| 301 | | | set yet. |
| 302 | | | |
| 303 | | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when |
| 304 | | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1* |
| 305 | | | |
| 306 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable. |
| 307 | | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2* |
| 308 | | |
| 309 | +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any |
| 310 | | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source |
| 311 | | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following. |
| 312 | | | |
| 313 | | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option |
| 314 | | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is |
| 315 | | | made for known file types. *synload-3* |
| 316 | | | |
| 317 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile* |
| 318 | | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. |
| 319 | | | *synload-4* |
| 320 | | | |
| 321 | | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file |
| 322 | | | type was detected yet. *synload-5* |
| 323 | | | |
| 324 | | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim| |
| 325 | | |
| 326 | +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file |
| 327 | | type has been detected. *synload-6* |
| 328 | | |
| 329 | +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each |
| 330 | already loaded buffer. |
| 331 | |
| 332 | |
| 333 | Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows: |
| 334 | |
| 335 | Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands. |
| 336 | | |
| 337 | +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3| |
| 338 | | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype' |
| 339 | | option is set to the file type. |
| 340 | | |
| 341 | +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not |
| 342 | | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This |
| 343 | | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following. |
| 344 | | | |
| 345 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile* |
| 346 | | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. |
| 347 | | | |
| 348 | | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file, |
| 349 | | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the |
| 350 | | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'. |
| 351 | | |
| 352 | +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this |
| 353 | | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets |
| 354 | | 'syntax' to the determined file type. |
| 355 | | |
| 356 | +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand |
| 357 | | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in |
| 358 | | 'runtimepath', with this command: |
| 359 | | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim |
| 360 | | |
| 361 | +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are |
| 362 | triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific |
| 363 | syntax. |
| 364 | |
| 365 | ============================================================================== |
| 366 | 4. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks* |
| 367 | |
| 368 | *b:current_syntax-variable* |
| 369 | Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the |
| 370 | "b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other |
| 371 | settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: > |
| 372 | :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh" |
| 373 | :au BufReadPost * do-some-things |
| 374 | :au BufReadPost * endif |
| 375 | |
| 376 | |
| 377 | 2HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML* |
| 378 | |
| 379 | This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current |
| 380 | window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file. |
| 381 | |
| 382 | You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"! |
| 383 | Source the script to convert the current file: > |
| 384 | |
| 385 | :runtime! syntax/2html.vim |
| 386 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 387 | *:TOhtml* |
| 388 | Or use the ":TOhtml" user command. It is defined in a standard plugin. |
| 389 | ":TOhtml" also works with a range and in a Visual area: > |
| 390 | |
| 391 | :10,40TOhtml |
| 392 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 166af9b | 2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 393 | Warning: This can be slow! The script must process every character of every |
| 394 | line. Because it can take a long time, by default a progress bar is displayed |
| 395 | in the statusline for each major step in the conversion process. If you don't |
| 396 | like seeing this progress bar, you can disable it and get a very minor speed |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 397 | improvement with: > |
| 398 | |
| 399 | let g:html_no_progress = 1 |
| 400 | |
Bram Moolenaar | b02cbe3 | 2010-07-11 22:38:52 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 401 | ":TOhtml" has another special feature: if the window is in diff mode, it will |
| 402 | generate HTML that shows all the related windows. This can be disabled by |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 403 | setting the g:html_diff_one_file variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | b02cbe3 | 2010-07-11 22:38:52 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 404 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 405 | let g:html_diff_one_file = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | b02cbe3 | 2010-07-11 22:38:52 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 406 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 407 | After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The |
| 408 | colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 409 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 410 | To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml| |
| 411 | command, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first and |
| 412 | last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 413 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 414 | :let g:html_start_line = line("'<") |
| 415 | :let g:html_end_line = line("'>") |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 416 | |
| 417 | The lines are numbered according to 'number' option and the Number |
| 418 | highlighting. You can force lines to be numbered in the HTML output by |
| 419 | setting "html_number_lines" to non-zero value: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 420 | :let g:html_number_lines = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 421 | Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 422 | :let g:html_number_lines = 0 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 423 | Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 424 | :unlet g:html_number_lines |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 425 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 076e8b2 | 2010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 426 | By default, valid HTML 4.01 using cascading style sheets (CSS1) is generated. |
| 427 | If you need to generate markup for really old browsers or some other user |
| 428 | agent that lacks basic CSS support, use: > |
| 429 | :let g:html_use_css = 0 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 430 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 7510fe7 | 2010-07-25 12:46:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 431 | Concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with the appropriate |
Bram Moolenaar | fa0ff9a | 2010-07-25 16:05:19 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 432 | character from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' depending on the current value of |
Bram Moolenaar | 7510fe7 | 2010-07-25 12:46:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 433 | 'conceallevel'. If you always want to display all text in your document, |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada2cc | 2010-07-29 20:43:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 434 | either set 'conceallevel' to zero before invoking 2html, or use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7510fe7 | 2010-07-25 12:46:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 435 | :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1 |
| 436 | |
| 437 | Similarly, closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed. If you |
| 438 | don't want this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 439 | :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 440 | |
| 441 | You may want to generate HTML that includes all the data within the folds, and |
| 442 | allow the user to view the folded data similar to how they would in Vim. To |
| 443 | generate this dynamic fold information, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 444 | :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 445 | |
| 446 | Using html_dynamic_folds will imply html_use_css, because it would be far too |
| 447 | difficult to do it for old browsers. However, html_ignore_folding overrides |
| 448 | html_dynamic_folds. |
| 449 | |
| 450 | Using html_dynamic_folds will default to generating a foldcolumn in the html |
| 451 | similar to Vim's foldcolumn, that will use javascript to open and close the |
| 452 | folds in the HTML document. The width of this foldcolumn starts at the current |
| 453 | setting of |'foldcolumn'| but grows to fit the greatest foldlevel in your |
| 454 | document. If you do not want to show a foldcolumn at all, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 455 | :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 456 | |
| 457 | Using this option, there will be no foldcolumn available to open the folds in |
| 458 | the HTML. For this reason, another option is provided: html_hover_unfold. |
| 459 | Enabling this option will use CSS 2.0 to allow a user to open a fold by |
| 460 | hovering the mouse pointer over it. Note that old browsers (notably Internet |
| 461 | Explorer 6) will not support this feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is |
| 462 | included to fall back to the normal CSS1 code so that the folds show up |
| 463 | correctly for this browser, but they will not be openable without a |
| 464 | foldcolumn. Note that using html_hover_unfold will allow modern browsers with |
| 465 | disabled javascript to view closed folds. To use this option, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 466 | :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 467 | |
| 468 | Setting html_no_foldcolumn with html_dynamic_folds will automatically set |
| 469 | html_hover_unfold, because otherwise the folds wouldn't be dynamic. |
| 470 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8e5af3e | 2011-04-28 19:02:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 471 | By default "<pre>" and "</pre>" are used around the text. When 'wrap' is set |
| 472 | in the window being converted, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is |
| 473 | used to wrap the text. You can explicitly enable the wrapping with: > |
| 474 | :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1 |
| 475 | or disable with > |
| 476 | :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0 |
| 477 | This generates HTML that looks very close to the Vim window, but unfortunately |
| 478 | there can be minor differences such as the lack of a 'showbreak' option in in |
| 479 | the HTML, or where line breaks can occur. |
| 480 | |
| 481 | Another way to obtain text wrapping in the HTML, at the risk of making some |
| 482 | things look even more different, is to use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 483 | :let g:html_no_pre = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 484 | This will use <br> at the end of each line and use " " for repeated |
Bram Moolenaar | 8e5af3e | 2011-04-28 19:02:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 485 | spaces. Doing it this way is more compatible with old browsers, but modern |
| 486 | browsers support the "white-space" method. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 487 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8e5af3e | 2011-04-28 19:02:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 488 | If you do stick with the default "<pre>" tags, <Tab> characters in the text |
| 489 | are included in the generated output if they will have no effect on the |
| 490 | appearance of the text and it looks like they are in the document |
| 491 | intentionally. This allows for the HTML output to be copied and pasted from a |
| 492 | browser without losing the actual whitespace used in the document. |
Bram Moolenaar | 2a8a3ec | 2011-01-08 16:06:37 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 493 | |
| 494 | Specifically, <Tab> characters will be included if the 'tabstop' option is set |
| 495 | to the default of 8, 'expandtab' is not set, and if neither the foldcolumn nor |
| 496 | the line numbers are included in the HTML output (see options above). When any |
| 497 | of these conditions are not met, any <Tab> characters in the text are expanded |
| 498 | to the appropriate number of spaces in the HTML output. |
| 499 | |
| 500 | When "<pre>" is included, you can force |:TOhtml| to keep the tabs even if the |
| 501 | other conditions are not met with: > |
| 502 | :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0 |
| 503 | Note that this can easily break text alignment and indentation in the HTML. |
| 504 | |
| 505 | Force tabs to be expanded even when they would be kept using: > |
| 506 | :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1 |
| 507 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 166af9b | 2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 508 | For diff mode on a single file (with g:html_diff_one_file) a sequence of more |
| 509 | than 3 filler lines is displayed as three lines with the middle line |
| 510 | mentioning the total number of inserted lines. If you prefer to see all the |
| 511 | inserted lines as with the side-by-side diff, use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 512 | :let g:html_whole_filler = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 47136d7 | 2004-10-12 20:02:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 513 | And to go back to displaying up to three lines again: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 349b2fb | 2010-07-16 20:35:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 514 | :unlet g:html_whole_filler |
Bram Moolenaar | 8e5af3e | 2011-04-28 19:02:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 515 | |
| 516 | For most buffers, TOhtml uses the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or |
| 517 | 'encoding' if not, to determine the charset and 'fileencoding' of the HTML |
| 518 | file. 'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. In general, this |
| 519 | works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in |encoding-names|, |
| 520 | but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings which are widely |
| 521 | supported. However, you can override this to support specific encodings that |
| 522 | may not be automatically detected by default. |
Bram Moolenaar | 166af9b | 2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 523 | |
| 524 | To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the |
| 525 | name of the charset to be used. TOhtml will try to determine the appropriate |
| 526 | 'fileencoding' setting from the charset, but you may need to set it manually |
| 527 | if TOhtml cannot determine the encoding. It is recommended to set this |
| 528 | variable to something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be |
| 529 | hosting on a webserver: > |
| 530 | :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8" |
| 531 | You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset |
| 532 | entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string: > |
| 533 | :let g:html_use_encoding = "" |
| 534 | To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the g:html_use_encoding |
| 535 | variable: > |
| 536 | :unlet g:html_use_encoding |
| 537 | |
| 538 | If you specify a charset with g:html_use_encoding for which TOhtml cannot |
| 539 | automatically detect the corresponding 'fileencoding' setting, you can use |
| 540 | g:html_encoding_override to allow TOhtml to detect the correct encoding. |
| 541 | This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing |
| 542 | pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs. For |
| 543 | example, to allow TOhtml to detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" properly as |
| 544 | the encoding "8bit-cp1252", use: > |
| 545 | :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'} |
| 546 | < |
| 547 | The g:html_charset_override is similar, it allows TOhtml to detect the HTML |
| 548 | charset for any 'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected |
| 549 | automatically. You can also use it to override specific existing |
| 550 | encoding-charset pairs. For example, TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all |
| 551 | Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16 and UTF-32 instead, use: > |
| 552 | :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'} |
| 553 | |
| 554 | Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known |
| 555 | compatibility problems with at least one major browser. |
| 556 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 557 | *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* |
Bram Moolenaar | 166af9b | 2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 558 | If you do not like plain HTML, an alternative is to have the script generate |
| 559 | XHTML (XML compliant HTML). To do this set the "html_use_xhtml" variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 076e8b2 | 2010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 560 | :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1 |
| 561 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 166af9b | 2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 562 | Any of the on/off options listed above can be enabled or disabled by setting |
| 563 | them explicitly to the desired value, or restored to their default by removing |
| 564 | the variable using |:unlet|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 565 | |
| 566 | Remarks: |
Bram Moolenaar | 076e8b2 | 2010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 567 | - Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 568 | - From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)! |
Bram Moolenaar | 166af9b | 2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 569 | - This version of TOhtml may work with older versions of Vim, but some |
| 570 | features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be |
| 571 | incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 572 | |
| 573 | Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a |
| 574 | Unix shell: > |
| 575 | for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done |
| 576 | < |
| 577 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 578 | ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 579 | |
| 580 | ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign |
| 581 | any value to the respective variable. Example: > |
| 582 | :let abel_obsolete_ok=1 |
| 583 | To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > |
| 584 | :unlet abel_obsolete_ok |
| 585 | |
| 586 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 587 | abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors |
| 588 | abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader |
| 589 | |
| 590 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 591 | ADA |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 592 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 593 | See |ft-ada-syntax| |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 594 | |
| 595 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 596 | ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 597 | |
| 598 | The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 599 | by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 600 | by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 601 | and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 602 | |
| 603 | :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim') |
| 604 | |
| 605 | will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code > |
| 606 | |
| 607 | <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[ |
| 608 | # everything inside is highlighted as perl |
| 609 | ]]></script> |
| 610 | |
| 611 | See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently. |
| 612 | |
| 613 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 614 | APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 615 | |
| 616 | The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting depending on Apache HTTP |
| 617 | server version, by default for 1.3.x. Set "apache_version" to Apache version |
| 618 | (as a string) to get highlighting for another version. Example: > |
| 619 | |
| 620 | :let apache_version = "2.0" |
| 621 | < |
| 622 | |
| 623 | *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k* |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 624 | ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax* |
| 625 | *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 626 | |
| 627 | Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection |
| 628 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 629 | startup vimrc: > |
| 630 | :let filetype_i = "asm" |
| 631 | Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use. |
| 632 | |
| 633 | There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name |
| 634 | extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a |
| 635 | line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax |
| 636 | files are included: |
| 637 | asm GNU assembly (the default) |
| 638 | asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly |
| 639 | asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly |
| 640 | ia64 Intel Itanium 64 |
| 641 | fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net) |
| 642 | masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86) |
| 643 | nasm Netwide assembly |
| 644 | tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and |
| 645 | MMX) |
| 646 | pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) |
| 647 | |
| 648 | The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 649 | asmsyntax=nasm |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 650 | Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 651 | one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be |
| 652 | immediately before or after this text. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 653 | |
| 654 | The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the |
| 655 | b:asmsyntax variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 656 | :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 657 | |
| 658 | If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of |
| 659 | the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly |
| 660 | language: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 661 | :let asmsyntax = "nasm" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 662 | |
| 663 | As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used. |
| 664 | |
| 665 | |
| 666 | Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~ |
| 667 | |
| 668 | To enable a feature: > |
| 669 | :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm |
| 670 | To disable a feature: > |
| 671 | :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm |
| 672 | |
| 673 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 674 | nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error |
| 675 | (parser dependent; not recommended) |
| 676 | nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error |
| 677 | nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo |
| 678 | |
| 679 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 680 | ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 681 | |
| 682 | *.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's |
| 683 | hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are |
| 684 | using. For Perl script use: > |
| 685 | :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl" |
| 686 | :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl" |
| 687 | For Visual Basic use: > |
| 688 | :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs" |
| 689 | :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs" |
| 690 | |
| 691 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 692 | BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 693 | |
| 694 | The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN |
| 695 | for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants |
| 696 | are supported. |
| 697 | |
| 698 | Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify |
| 699 | in ones |.vimrc|: > |
| 700 | let baan_code_stds=1 |
| 701 | |
| 702 | *baan-folding* |
| 703 | |
| 704 | Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables |
| 705 | mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on |
| 706 | source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive. |
| 707 | |
| 708 | To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: > |
| 709 | let baan_fold=1 |
| 710 | Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The |
| 711 | indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not |
| 712 | considered equal to a tab). > |
| 713 | let baan_fold_block=1 |
| 714 | Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO, |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 715 | SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 716 | match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > |
| 717 | let baan_fold_sql=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 718 | Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set| |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 719 | the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in |
| 720 | .../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: > |
| 721 | set foldminlines=5 |
| 722 | set foldnestmax=6 |
| 723 | |
| 724 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 725 | BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 726 | |
| 727 | Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect |
| 728 | which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first |
| 729 | five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic", |
| 730 | otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual |
| 731 | Basic. |
| 732 | |
| 733 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 734 | C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 735 | |
| 736 | A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value |
| 737 | to the respective variable. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 738 | :let c_comment_strings = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 739 | To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > |
| 740 | :unlet c_comment_strings |
| 741 | |
| 742 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 743 | c_gnu GNU gcc specific items |
| 744 | c_comment_strings strings and numbers inside a comment |
| 745 | c_space_errors trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> |
| 746 | c_no_trail_space_error ... but no trailing spaces |
| 747 | c_no_tab_space_error ... but no spaces before a <Tab> |
| 748 | c_no_bracket_error don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors |
Bram Moolenaar | 677ee68 | 2005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 749 | c_no_curly_error don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors; |
| 750 | except { and } in first column |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 751 | c_curly_error highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the |
| 752 | start of the file, can be slow |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 753 | c_no_ansi don't do standard ANSI types and constants |
| 754 | c_ansi_typedefs ... but do standard ANSI types |
| 755 | c_ansi_constants ... but do standard ANSI constants |
| 756 | c_no_utf don't highlight \u and \U in strings |
| 757 | c_syntax_for_h use C syntax for *.h files, instead of C++ |
| 758 | c_no_if0 don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments |
| 759 | c_no_cformat don't highlight %-formats in strings |
| 760 | c_no_c99 don't highlight C99 standard items |
Bram Moolenaar | 6ee8d89 | 2012-01-10 14:55:01 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 761 | c_no_c11 don't highlight C11 standard items |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 762 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 763 | When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will |
| 764 | become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: > |
| 765 | :let c_no_comment_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | f9393ef | 2006-04-24 19:47:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 766 | "#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: > |
| 767 | :let c_no_if0_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 768 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 769 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 770 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable |
| 771 | to a larger number: > |
| 772 | :let c_minlines = 100 |
| 773 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first |
| 774 | displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The |
| 775 | disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 776 | |
| 777 | When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only |
| 778 | works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If |
| 779 | you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly. |
| 780 | |
| 781 | To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster. |
| 782 | Example: > |
| 783 | :au Syntax c call MyCadd() |
| 784 | :function MyCadd() |
| 785 | : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni |
| 786 | : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem |
| 787 | : hi link cMyItem Title |
| 788 | :endfun |
| 789 | |
| 790 | ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes |
| 791 | "NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is |
| 792 | not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant |
| 793 | highlighting: > |
| 794 | :hi link cConstant NONE |
| 795 | |
| 796 | If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the |
| 797 | highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket. |
| 798 | |
| 799 | If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file |
Bram Moolenaar | 06b5d51 | 2010-05-22 15:37:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 800 | in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 801 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 802 | syn sync fromstart |
| 803 | set foldmethod=syntax |
| 804 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 805 | CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 806 | |
| 807 | C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon |
| 808 | the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C. |
| 809 | |
| 810 | By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead |
| 811 | of C or C++: > |
| 812 | :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1 |
| 813 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 814 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 815 | CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 816 | |
| 817 | Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings |
| 818 | that are available. Additionally there is: |
| 819 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 820 | chill_space_errors like c_space_errors |
| 821 | chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings |
| 822 | chill_minlines like c_minlines |
| 823 | |
| 824 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 825 | CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 826 | |
| 827 | ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line. |
| 828 | If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: > |
| 829 | let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0 |
| 830 | This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use |
| 831 | "b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax |
| 832 | file). |
| 833 | |
| 834 | You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: > |
| 835 | :hi link ChangelogError Error |
| 836 | Or to avoid the highlighting: > |
| 837 | :hi link ChangelogError NONE |
| 838 | This works immediately. |
| 839 | |
| 840 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 841 | COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 842 | |
| 843 | COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh |
| 844 | development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance |
| 845 | versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting, |
| 846 | add this line to your .vimrc: > |
| 847 | :let cobol_legacy_code = 1 |
| 848 | To disable it again, use this: > |
| 849 | :unlet cobol_legacy_code |
| 850 | |
| 851 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 852 | COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 853 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 854 | The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 855 | comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 856 | |
| 857 | :let html_wrong_comments = 1 |
| 858 | |
| 859 | The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file. |
| 860 | |
| 861 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 862 | CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 863 | |
| 864 | This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually |
| 865 | used. |
| 866 | |
| 867 | Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems |
| 868 | symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish |
| 869 | between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the |
Bram Moolenaar | 9729301 | 2011-07-18 19:40:27 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 870 | "filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh* |
| 871 | > |
| 872 | :let g:filetype_csh = "csh" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 873 | |
| 874 | For using tcsh: > |
| 875 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 9729301 | 2011-07-18 19:40:27 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 876 | :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 877 | |
| 878 | Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc, |
| 879 | tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 880 | will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 881 | "filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the |
| 882 | variable. |
| 883 | |
| 884 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 885 | CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 886 | |
| 887 | Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 888 | hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 889 | or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 890 | normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 891 | line to your .vimrc file: > |
| 892 | |
| 893 | :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1 |
| 894 | |
| 895 | Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) > |
| 896 | |
| 897 | :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1 |
| 898 | |
| 899 | To disable these again, use this: > |
| 900 | |
| 901 | :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc |
| 902 | :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp |
| 903 | < |
| 904 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 905 | CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 906 | |
| 907 | Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection |
| 908 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 909 | startup vimrc: > |
| 910 | :let filetype_w = "cweb" |
| 911 | |
| 912 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 913 | DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 914 | |
| 915 | Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files |
Bram Moolenaar | a17d4c1 | 2010-05-30 18:30:36 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 916 | according to freedesktop.org standard: |
| 917 | http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 918 | But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 919 | highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 920 | to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: > |
| 921 | :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1 |
| 922 | |
| 923 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 924 | DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 925 | |
| 926 | The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to |
| 927 | provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of |
| 928 | the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most |
| 929 | versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and |
| 930 | uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following |
| 931 | line to your startup file: > |
| 932 | let dircolors_is_slackware = 1 |
| 933 | |
| 934 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 935 | DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook* |
Bram Moolenaar | 81af925 | 2010-12-10 20:35:50 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 936 | DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax* |
| 937 | DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 938 | |
| 939 | There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you |
| 940 | are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you |
| 941 | automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type |
| 942 | defaults to XML. |
| 943 | You can set the type manually: > |
| 944 | :let docbk_type = "sgml" |
| 945 | or: > |
| 946 | :let docbk_type = "xml" |
| 947 | You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated. |
| 948 | Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": > |
| 949 | :set filetype=docbksgml |
| 950 | or: > |
| 951 | :set filetype=docbkxml |
| 952 | |
| 953 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 954 | DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 955 | |
| 956 | There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new |
| 957 | extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and |
| 958 | is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT |
| 959 | this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2. |
| 960 | Select the version you want with the following line: > |
| 961 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 962 | :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 963 | |
| 964 | If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support |
| 965 | Windows 2000. |
| 966 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 967 | A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 968 | "dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter |
| 969 | is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 970 | |
| 971 | :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1 |
| 972 | |
| 973 | If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected. |
| 974 | |
| 975 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 976 | DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax* |
| 977 | |
| 978 | Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format |
Bram Moolenaar | e37d50a | 2008-08-06 17:06:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 979 | (similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp, |
| 980 | idl and php files, and should also work with java. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 981 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 982 | There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done |
| 983 | explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file. |
| 984 | Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 985 | :set syntax=c.doxygen |
| 986 | or > |
| 987 | // vim:syntax=c.doxygen |
| 988 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 5dc6252 | 2012-02-13 00:05:22 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 989 | It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting |
| 990 | the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by |
| 991 | adding the following to your .vimrc. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 992 | :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1 |
| 993 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 06b5d51 | 2010-05-22 15:37:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 994 | There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 995 | are to do with non-standard highlighting options. |
| 996 | |
| 997 | Variable Default Effect ~ |
| 998 | g:doxygen_enhanced_color |
| 999 | g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for |
| 1000 | doxygen comments. |
| 1001 | |
| 1002 | doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic |
| 1003 | and html_my_rendering underline. |
| 1004 | |
| 1005 | doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief |
| 1006 | colour highlighting. |
| 1007 | |
| 1008 | doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1009 | punctuation of brief |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1010 | |
| 1011 | There are also some hilight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in |
| 1012 | configuration. |
| 1013 | |
| 1014 | Highlight Effect ~ |
| 1015 | doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing |
| 1016 | punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section |
| 1017 | doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the |
| 1018 | \endlink from a \link section. |
| 1019 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1020 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1021 | DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1022 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1023 | The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1024 | case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1025 | |
| 1026 | :let dtd_ignore_case=1 |
| 1027 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1028 | The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1029 | this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: > |
| 1030 | |
| 1031 | :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1 |
| 1032 | |
| 1033 | before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file. |
| 1034 | Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the |
| 1035 | 'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'. |
| 1036 | Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant' |
| 1037 | highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1038 | delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1039 | |
| 1040 | :let dtd_no_param_entities=1 |
| 1041 | |
| 1042 | The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's. |
| 1043 | |
| 1044 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1045 | EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1046 | |
| 1047 | While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1048 | syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to |
| 1049 | highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1050 | highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1051 | |
| 1052 | :let eiffel_ignore_case=1 |
| 1053 | |
| 1054 | Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments. |
| 1055 | |
| 1056 | Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: > |
| 1057 | |
| 1058 | :let eiffel_strict=1 |
| 1059 | :let eiffel_pedantic=1 |
| 1060 | |
| 1061 | Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the |
| 1062 | five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and |
| 1063 | "NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names. |
| 1064 | |
| 1065 | Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style |
| 1066 | guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and |
| 1067 | lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords). |
| 1068 | |
| 1069 | If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void", |
| 1070 | "Result", and "Precursor", you can use > |
| 1071 | |
| 1072 | :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1 |
| 1073 | |
| 1074 | instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off. |
| 1075 | |
| 1076 | Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already |
| 1077 | experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: > |
| 1078 | |
| 1079 | :let eiffel_ise=1 |
| 1080 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1081 | Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1082 | |
| 1083 | :let eiffel_hex_constants=1 |
| 1084 | |
| 1085 | to your startup file. |
| 1086 | |
| 1087 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1088 | ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1089 | |
| 1090 | The erlang highlighting supports Erlang (ERicsson LANGuage). |
| 1091 | Erlang is case sensitive and default extension is ".erl". |
| 1092 | |
| 1093 | If you want to disable keywords highlighting, put in your .vimrc: > |
| 1094 | :let erlang_keywords = 1 |
| 1095 | If you want to disable built-in-functions highlighting, put in your |
| 1096 | .vimrc file: > |
| 1097 | :let erlang_functions = 1 |
| 1098 | If you want to disable special characters highlighting, put in |
| 1099 | your .vimrc: > |
| 1100 | :let erlang_characters = 1 |
| 1101 | |
| 1102 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d68071d | 2006-05-02 22:08:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1103 | FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax* |
| 1104 | |
| 1105 | FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com |
Bram Moolenaar | 446beb4 | 2011-05-10 17:18:44 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 1106 | NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that |
| 1107 | development stopped in 2009. |
Bram Moolenaar | d68071d | 2006-05-02 22:08:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1108 | |
| 1109 | Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki |
| 1110 | syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make |
| 1111 | editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the |
| 1112 | start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length), |
| 1113 | 'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak' |
| 1114 | (to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen), |
| 1115 | and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default. |
| 1116 | |
| 1117 | If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys |
| 1118 | move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: > |
| 1119 | :let flexwiki_maps = 1 |
| 1120 | |
| 1121 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1122 | FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1123 | |
| 1124 | The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default |
| 1125 | modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String, |
Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1126 | following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1127 | J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991. |
| 1128 | |
| 1129 | If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to |
| 1130 | redefine the following syntax groups: |
| 1131 | |
| 1132 | - formConditional |
| 1133 | - formNumber |
| 1134 | - formStatement |
| 1135 | - formHeaderStatement |
| 1136 | - formComment |
| 1137 | - formPreProc |
| 1138 | - formDirective |
| 1139 | - formType |
| 1140 | - formString |
| 1141 | |
| 1142 | Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and |
| 1143 | directives per default in the same syntax group. |
| 1144 | |
| 1145 | A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1146 | header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1147 | this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file > |
| 1148 | |
| 1149 | :let form_enhanced_color=1 |
| 1150 | |
| 1151 | The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1152 | gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1153 | conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction. |
| 1154 | |
| 1155 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1156 | FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1157 | |
| 1158 | Default highlighting and dialect ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 6ee8d89 | 2012-01-10 14:55:01 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1159 | Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice |
| 1160 | should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is |
| 1161 | almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1162 | |
| 1163 | Fortran source code form ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1164 | Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1165 | syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set. |
| 1166 | |
| 1167 | When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1168 | form. If you always use free source form, then > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1169 | :let fortran_free_source=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1170 | in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1171 | form, then > |
| 1172 | :let fortran_fixed_source=1 |
| 1173 | in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. |
| 1174 | |
| 1175 | If the form of the source code depends upon the file extension, then it is |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1176 | most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin file. For more |
| 1177 | information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1178 | fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in free source form and the |
| 1179 | rest in fixed source form, add the following code to your ftplugin file > |
| 1180 | let s:extfname = expand("%:e") |
| 1181 | if s:extfname ==? "f90" |
| 1182 | let fortran_free_source=1 |
| 1183 | unlet! fortran_fixed_source |
| 1184 | else |
| 1185 | let fortran_fixed_source=1 |
| 1186 | unlet! fortran_free_source |
| 1187 | endif |
| 1188 | Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command |
| 1189 | precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. |
| 1190 | |
| 1191 | When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free |
| 1192 | source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1193 | fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1194 | neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to |
| 1195 | determine which source form has been used by examining the first five columns |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1196 | of the first 250 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form are |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1197 | detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The algorithm |
| 1198 | should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a file that |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1199 | begins with 250 or more full-line comments, the script may incorrectly decide |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1200 | that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens, just add a |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1201 | non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns of the |
| 1202 | first twenty five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file. |
| 1203 | |
| 1204 | Tabs in fortran files ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1205 | Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1206 | fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries. |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1207 | Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like |
| 1208 | using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1209 | variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as > |
| 1210 | :let fortran_have_tabs=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1211 | placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1212 | mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins. |
| 1213 | |
| 1214 | Syntax folding of fortran files ~ |
| 1215 | If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable |
| 1216 | fortran_fold with a command such as > |
| 1217 | :let fortran_fold=1 |
| 1218 | to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that |
| 1219 | is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1220 | subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1221 | also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as > |
| 1222 | :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1 |
| 1223 | then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1224 | case constructs. If you also set the variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1225 | fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as > |
| 1226 | :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1 |
| 1227 | then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1228 | lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1229 | |
| 1230 | If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or |
| 1231 | fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1232 | you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1233 | units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program |
| 1234 | unit. |
| 1235 | |
| 1236 | More precise fortran syntax ~ |
| 1237 | If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as > |
| 1238 | :let fortran_more_precise=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1239 | then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1240 | statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be |
| 1241 | recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall |
| 1242 | construct. |
| 1243 | |
| 1244 | Non-default fortran dialects ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1245 | The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably |
| 1246 | find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs |
| 1247 | deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo |
| 1248 | items. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1249 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1250 | If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that |
| 1251 | other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and |
| 1252 | that free source form will be assumed. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1253 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1254 | The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use |
| 1255 | the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior |
| 1256 | to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of |
| 1257 | fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are |
| 1258 | ignored. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1259 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1260 | If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to |
| 1261 | set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on |
| 1262 | ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with |
| 1263 | an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should |
| 1264 | contain the code > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1265 | let s:extfname = expand("%:e") |
| 1266 | if s:extfname ==? "f90" |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1267 | let b:fortran_dialect="F" |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1268 | else |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1269 | unlet! b:fortran_dialect |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1270 | endif |
| 1271 | Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command |
| 1272 | precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. |
| 1273 | |
| 1274 | Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1275 | the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, |
| 1276 | by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or |
| 1277 | f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f |
| 1278 | files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would |
| 1279 | identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a |
| 1280 | Fortran comment of the form > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1281 | ! fortran_dialect=F |
Bram Moolenaar | 6be7f87 | 2012-01-20 21:08:56 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1282 | |
| 1283 | For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the |
| 1284 | now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be |
| 1285 | silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F" |
| 1286 | instead. |
| 1287 | |
| 1288 | The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to |
| 1289 | comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some |
| 1290 | non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted |
| 1291 | or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo |
| 1292 | items. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1293 | |
| 1294 | Limitations ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1295 | Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith |
| 1296 | strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1297 | because Fortran90 has no reserved words. |
| 1298 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1299 | For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and |
| 1300 | |ft-fortran-plugin|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1301 | |
| 1302 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1303 | FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1304 | |
| 1305 | In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match |
| 1306 | the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns |
| 1307 | appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these |
| 1308 | patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version |
| 1309 | number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm. |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 | For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/ |
| 1312 | as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: > |
| 1313 | |
| 1314 | :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 | |
| 1315 | \ set filetype=fvwm |
| 1316 | |
| 1317 | If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to |
| 1318 | find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting |
| 1319 | "rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located |
| 1320 | in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line > |
| 1321 | |
| 1322 | :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt" |
| 1323 | |
| 1324 | to your .vimrc file. |
| 1325 | |
| 1326 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1327 | GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1328 | |
| 1329 | The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and |
| 1330 | the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks) |
| 1331 | is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim| |
| 1332 | are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code: |
| 1333 | |
| 1334 | htmlString |
| 1335 | htmlValue |
| 1336 | htmlEndTag |
| 1337 | htmlTag |
| 1338 | htmlTagN |
| 1339 | |
| 1340 | Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline |
| 1341 | java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML |
| 1342 | group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight |
| 1343 | correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava |
| 1344 | to the contains clause. |
| 1345 | |
| 1346 | The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError |
| 1347 | group to make them easier to see. |
| 1348 | |
| 1349 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1350 | GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1351 | |
| 1352 | The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1353 | under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1354 | of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the |
| 1355 | filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file |
| 1356 | (see |filetype.txt|). |
| 1357 | |
| 1358 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1359 | HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1360 | |
| 1361 | The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1362 | Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1363 | syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives. |
| 1364 | |
| 1365 | If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a |
| 1366 | light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: > |
| 1367 | :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1 |
| 1368 | To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers, |
| 1369 | add: > |
| 1370 | :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1 |
| 1371 | To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: > |
| 1372 | :let hs_highlight_types = 1 |
| 1373 | And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: > |
| 1374 | :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1 |
| 1375 | If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in |
| 1376 | your .vimrc: > |
| 1377 | :let hs_highlight_debug = 1 |
| 1378 | |
| 1379 | The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor |
| 1380 | directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1381 | directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for |
| 1382 | operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1383 | as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: > |
| 1384 | :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1 |
| 1385 | |
| 1386 | The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to |
| 1387 | automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains |
| 1388 | TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1389 | or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1390 | in your .vimrc > |
| 1391 | :let lhs_markup = none |
| 1392 | for no highlighting at all, or > |
| 1393 | :let lhs_markup = tex |
| 1394 | to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup. |
| 1395 | For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of |
| 1396 | this variable, so e.g. > |
| 1397 | :let b:lhs_markup = tex |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1398 | will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1399 | set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or |
| 1400 | loading a file. |
| 1401 | |
| 1402 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1403 | HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1404 | |
| 1405 | The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows. |
| 1406 | |
| 1407 | The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. |
| 1408 | This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for |
| 1409 | closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are |
| 1410 | defined for you) |
| 1411 | |
| 1412 | Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag |
| 1413 | names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which |
| 1414 | makes it easy to spot errors |
| 1415 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1416 | Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1417 | names are colored differently than unknown ones. |
| 1418 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1419 | Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1420 | are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal |
| 1421 | text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>, |
| 1422 | while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1423 | only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1424 | <A href="somefile.html">). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1425 | |
| 1426 | If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the |
| 1427 | following syntax groups: |
| 1428 | |
| 1429 | - htmlBold |
| 1430 | - htmlBoldUnderline |
| 1431 | - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic |
| 1432 | - htmlUnderline |
| 1433 | - htmlUnderlineItalic |
| 1434 | - htmlItalic |
| 1435 | - htmlTitle for titles |
| 1436 | - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings |
| 1437 | |
| 1438 | To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception |
| 1439 | of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the |
| 1440 | following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files |
| 1441 | are read during initialization) > |
| 1442 | :let html_my_rendering=1 |
| 1443 | |
| 1444 | If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at |
| 1445 | http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html |
| 1446 | |
| 1447 | You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your |
| 1448 | vimrc file: > |
| 1449 | :let html_no_rendering=1 |
| 1450 | |
| 1451 | HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the |
| 1452 | details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors. |
| 1453 | However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and |
| 1454 | ends with --!>) you can define > |
| 1455 | :let html_wrong_comments=1 |
| 1456 | |
| 1457 | JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as |
| 1458 | 'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1459 | programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1460 | supported, no other scripting language has been added yet. |
| 1461 | |
| 1462 | Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too. |
| 1463 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1464 | There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been |
| 1465 | written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1466 | following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language |
| 1467 | (the example comes from the asp.vim file): |
| 1468 | |
| 1469 | runtime! syntax/html.vim |
| 1470 | syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp |
| 1471 | |
| 1472 | Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain |
| 1473 | the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc. |
| 1474 | |
| 1475 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1476 | HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1477 | |
| 1478 | The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows: |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 | Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM |
| 1481 | doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change |
| 1482 | this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a |
| 1483 | different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: > |
| 1484 | :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray |
| 1485 | |
| 1486 | Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose. |
| 1487 | |
| 1488 | Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to |
| 1489 | signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening |
| 1490 | a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: > |
| 1491 | :set syntax=htmlos |
| 1492 | |
| 1493 | Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a |
| 1494 | block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively. |
| 1495 | |
| 1496 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1497 | IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1498 | |
| 1499 | Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for |
| 1500 | how to recognize this filetype. |
| 1501 | |
| 1502 | To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: > |
| 1503 | :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64" |
| 1504 | |
| 1505 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1506 | INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1507 | |
| 1508 | Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as |
| 1509 | most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols |
| 1510 | to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: > |
| 1511 | :let inform_highlight_simple=1 |
| 1512 | |
| 1513 | By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted, |
| 1514 | and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If |
| 1515 | you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you |
| 1516 | need to add this to your startup sequence: > |
| 1517 | :let inform_highlight_glulx=1 |
| 1518 | |
| 1519 | This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the |
| 1520 | set of highlighted system functions. |
| 1521 | |
| 1522 | The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when |
| 1523 | it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors |
| 1524 | by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your |
| 1525 | startup sequence: > |
| 1526 | :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1 |
| 1527 | |
| 1528 | By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler |
| 1529 | version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older |
| 1530 | Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your |
| 1531 | startup sequence: > |
| 1532 | :let inform_highlight_old=1 |
| 1533 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 9e54a0e | 2006-04-14 20:42:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1534 | IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax* |
| 1535 | |
| 1536 | IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In |
| 1537 | Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls. |
| 1538 | |
| 1539 | IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to |
| 1540 | rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1541 | repetitive but seems to work. |
Bram Moolenaar | 9e54a0e | 2006-04-14 20:42:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1542 | |
| 1543 | There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them |
| 1544 | are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions. |
| 1545 | |
| 1546 | The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions. |
| 1547 | |
| 1548 | Variable Effect ~ |
| 1549 | |
| 1550 | idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific |
| 1551 | extensions |
| 1552 | idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions |
| 1553 | idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but |
| 1554 | quite helpful) |
| 1555 | idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors |
| 1556 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1557 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1558 | JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1559 | |
| 1560 | The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options: |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 | In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was |
| 1563 | flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1564 | classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1565 | way, put the following line into your vim startup file: > |
| 1566 | :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1 |
| 1567 | |
| 1568 | All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To |
| 1569 | highlight them use: > |
| 1570 | :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1 |
| 1571 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1572 | You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1573 | download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html. |
| 1574 | If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io |
| 1575 | use the following: > |
| 1576 | :let java_highlight_java_io=1 |
| 1577 | Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported. |
| 1578 | |
| 1579 | Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1580 | how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1581 | functions: |
| 1582 | |
| 1583 | If you write function declarations that are always indented by either |
| 1584 | a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set > |
| 1585 | :let java_highlight_functions="indent" |
| 1586 | However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are |
| 1587 | supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use > |
| 1588 | :let java_highlight_functions="style" |
| 1589 | If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function |
| 1590 | declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the |
| 1591 | definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the |
| 1592 | original one and then adds the code to highlight functions. |
| 1593 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1594 | In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should |
Bram Moolenaar | ed20346 | 2004-06-16 11:19:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1595 | only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1596 | statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1597 | your startup file: > |
| 1598 | :let java_highlight_debug=1 |
| 1599 | The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1600 | characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1601 | new highlightings for the following groups.: |
| 1602 | Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType |
| 1603 | which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1604 | strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1605 | have opted to chose another background for those statements. |
| 1606 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1607 | Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and |
| 1608 | creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code |
| 1609 | similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript |
| 1610 | and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1611 | 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by |
| 1612 | some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change |
| 1613 | the color change the group CommentTitle). |
| 1614 | 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'. |
| 1615 | 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1616 | 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1617 | and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function. |
| 1618 | To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1619 | :let java_ignore_javadoc=1 |
| 1620 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1621 | If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you |
| 1622 | can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic |
| 1623 | scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you |
| 1624 | actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded |
| 1625 | CSS. The options to use are > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1626 | :let java_javascript=1 |
| 1627 | :let java_css=1 |
| 1628 | :let java_vb=1 |
| 1629 | |
| 1630 | In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors |
| 1631 | for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with > |
| 1632 | :hi link javaParen Comment |
| 1633 | or > |
| 1634 | :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff |
| 1635 | |
| 1636 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 1637 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable |
| 1638 | to a larger number: > |
| 1639 | :let java_minlines = 50 |
| 1640 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first |
| 1641 | displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 1642 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 1643 | |
| 1644 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1645 | LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1646 | |
| 1647 | Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the |
| 1648 | style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just |
| 1649 | define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: > |
| 1650 | :let lace_case_insensitive=1 |
| 1651 | |
| 1652 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1653 | LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1654 | |
| 1655 | Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter |
| 1656 | gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for > |
| 1657 | :syn sync minlines=300 |
| 1658 | may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization |
| 1659 | difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files). |
| 1660 | |
| 1661 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 6fc45b5 | 2010-07-25 17:42:45 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 1662 | LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax* |
| 1663 | |
| 1664 | To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: > |
| 1665 | |
| 1666 | :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1 |
| 1667 | < |
| 1668 | |
Bram Moolenaar | a5fac54 | 2005-10-12 20:58:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1669 | LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax* |
| 1670 | |
| 1671 | The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: > |
| 1672 | |
| 1673 | g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted |
| 1674 | as if the contents of the string were lisp. |
| 1675 | Useful for AutoLisp. |
| 1676 | g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels |
| 1677 | of parenthesization will receive different |
| 1678 | highlighting. |
| 1679 | < |
| 1680 | The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for |
| 1681 | the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of |
| 1682 | colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode |
| 1683 | specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the |
| 1684 | usual colorscheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual |
| 1685 | highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|). |
| 1686 | |
| 1687 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1688 | LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1689 | |
| 1690 | There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting. |
| 1691 | |
| 1692 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 1693 | |
| 1694 | :let lite_sql_query = 1 |
| 1695 | |
| 1696 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 1697 | set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 1698 | |
| 1699 | :let lite_minlines = 200 |
| 1700 | |
| 1701 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1702 | LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1703 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1704 | LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensj| C. The |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1705 | file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother |
| 1706 | users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you |
| 1707 | should set a variable in your .vimrc file: > |
| 1708 | |
| 1709 | :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1 |
| 1710 | |
| 1711 | If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a |
| 1712 | modeline. For a LPC file: |
| 1713 | |
| 1714 | // vim:set ft=lpc: |
| 1715 | |
| 1716 | For a C file that is recognized as LPC: |
| 1717 | |
| 1718 | // vim:set ft=c: |
| 1719 | |
| 1720 | If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file. |
| 1721 | |
| 1722 | There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1723 | used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1724 | and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also |
| 1725 | asserts the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when |
| 1726 | you are using the latest version of MudOS: > |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 | :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1 |
| 1729 | |
| 1730 | For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: > |
| 1731 | |
| 1732 | :let lpc_compat_32 = 1 |
| 1733 | |
| 1734 | For LPC4 series of LPC: > |
| 1735 | |
| 1736 | :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1 |
| 1737 | |
| 1738 | For uLPC series of LPC: |
| 1739 | uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax |
| 1740 | instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1743 | LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1744 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 5dc6252 | 2012-02-13 00:05:22 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1745 | The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1746 | the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables |
| 1747 | lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua |
Bram Moolenaar | 5dc6252 | 2012-02-13 00:05:22 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 1748 | 5.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this: |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1749 | |
| 1750 | :let lua_version = 5 |
| 1751 | :let lua_subversion = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1752 | |
| 1753 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1754 | MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1755 | |
| 1756 | Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures, |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1757 | quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1758 | signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by |
| 1759 | whitespaces and end with a newline. |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 | Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1762 | as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1763 | only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space). |
| 1764 | |
| 1765 | By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1766 | displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1767 | with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: > |
| 1768 | |
| 1769 | :let mail_minlines = 30 |
| 1770 | |
| 1771 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1772 | MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1773 | |
| 1774 | In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot |
| 1775 | errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this |
| 1776 | feature off by using: > |
| 1777 | |
| 1778 | :let make_no_commands = 1 |
| 1779 | |
| 1780 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1781 | MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1782 | |
| 1783 | Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language |
| 1784 | supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user. |
| 1785 | The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be |
| 1786 | highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: > |
| 1787 | |
| 1788 | :let mvpkg_all= 1 |
| 1789 | |
| 1790 | to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by |
| 1791 | choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to |
| 1792 | 1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing |
| 1793 | $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim). |
| 1794 | |
| 1795 | Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors > |
| 1796 | mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process |
| 1797 | mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex |
| 1798 | mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats |
| 1799 | mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student |
| 1800 | mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools |
| 1801 | mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor |
| 1802 | mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder |
| 1803 | mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries |
| 1804 | |
| 1805 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1806 | MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 34cdc3e | 2005-05-18 22:24:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1807 | |
| 1808 | Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you |
| 1809 | have the following in your .vimrc: > |
| 1810 | |
| 1811 | let filetype_m = "mma" |
| 1812 | |
| 1813 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1814 | MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1815 | |
| 1816 | If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your |
| 1817 | highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style |
| 1818 | comments: > |
| 1819 | |
| 1820 | :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1 |
| 1821 | |
| 1822 | To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: > |
| 1823 | |
| 1824 | :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1 |
| 1825 | |
| 1826 | To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching |
| 1827 | '%(' and '%)' inside strings: > |
| 1828 | |
| 1829 | :let moo_no_regexp = 1 |
| 1830 | |
| 1831 | Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: > |
| 1832 | |
| 1833 | :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1 |
| 1834 | |
| 1835 | To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): > |
| 1836 | |
| 1837 | :let moo_builtin_properties = 1 |
| 1838 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1839 | Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1840 | use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group. |
| 1841 | To enable this option: > |
| 1842 | |
| 1843 | :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1 |
| 1844 | |
| 1845 | An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: > |
| 1846 | |
| 1847 | :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained |
| 1848 | |
| 1849 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1850 | MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1851 | |
| 1852 | There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting. |
| 1853 | |
| 1854 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 1855 | |
| 1856 | :let msql_sql_query = 1 |
| 1857 | |
| 1858 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 1859 | set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 1860 | |
| 1861 | :let msql_minlines = 200 |
| 1862 | |
| 1863 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1864 | NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1865 | |
| 1866 | There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting. |
| 1867 | |
| 1868 | If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as |
| 1869 | errors, use this: > |
| 1870 | |
| 1871 | :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1 |
| 1872 | |
| 1873 | If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset. |
| 1874 | |
| 1875 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1876 | NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1877 | |
| 1878 | The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to |
| 1879 | activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you |
| 1880 | can use them. |
| 1881 | |
| 1882 | For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1883 | processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1884 | features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: > |
| 1885 | |
| 1886 | :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1 |
| 1887 | |
| 1888 | Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in |
| 1889 | Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and |
| 1890 | there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1891 | you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1892 | can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's |
| 1893 | native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly: |
| 1894 | \[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm |
| 1895 | accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim |
| 1896 | environments. |
| 1897 | |
| 1898 | In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should |
| 1899 | follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation. |
| 1900 | |
| 1901 | 1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines. |
| 1902 | |
| 1903 | 2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period, |
| 1904 | exclamation mark, etc. |
| 1905 | |
| 1906 | 3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a |
| 1907 | carriage return. |
| 1908 | |
| 1909 | The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking |
| 1910 | algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above. |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 | Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and, |
| 1913 | furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and |
| 1914 | vertical space input will be output as is. |
| 1915 | |
| 1916 | Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences |
| 1917 | than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common |
| 1918 | practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1919 | marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1920 | need to maintaining regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing |
| 1921 | spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: > |
| 1922 | |
| 1923 | :let nroff_space_errors = 1 |
| 1924 | |
| 1925 | Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere |
| 1926 | with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching |
| 1927 | highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1928 | "nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1929 | |
| 1930 | hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse |
| 1931 | hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold |
| 1932 | \ gui=reverse,bold |
| 1933 | |
| 1934 | If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as |
| 1935 | with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc |
| 1936 | file: > |
| 1937 | |
| 1938 | let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1 |
| 1939 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 69a7cb4 | 2004-06-20 12:51:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1940 | As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1941 | paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package. |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling |
| 1944 | groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default. |
| 1945 | |
| 1946 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1947 | OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1948 | |
| 1949 | The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml, |
| 1950 | .mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable > |
| 1951 | |
| 1952 | :let ocaml_revised = 1 |
| 1953 | |
| 1954 | you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported |
| 1955 | by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable > |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 | :let ocaml_noend_error = 1 |
| 1958 | |
| 1959 | prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources |
| 1960 | contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore. |
| 1961 | |
| 1962 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1963 | PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1964 | |
| 1965 | The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml |
| 1966 | and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1967 | as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml |
| 1968 | sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1969 | you set the variable: > |
| 1970 | |
| 1971 | :let papp_include_html=1 |
| 1972 | |
| 1973 | in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml |
| 1974 | sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1975 | edit sensibly. ;) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1976 | |
| 1977 | The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at |
| 1978 | http://papp.plan9.de. |
| 1979 | |
| 1980 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1981 | PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1982 | |
| 1983 | Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection |
| 1984 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 1985 | startup vimrc: > |
| 1986 | |
| 1987 | :let filetype_p = "pascal" |
| 1988 | |
| 1989 | The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions |
| 1990 | provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler. |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1991 | Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1992 | enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the |
| 1993 | following line to your startup file: > |
| 1994 | |
| 1995 | :let pascal_traditional=1 |
| 1996 | |
| 1997 | To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments, |
| 1998 | keywords, etc): > |
| 1999 | |
| 2000 | :let pascal_delphi=1 |
| 2001 | |
| 2002 | |
| 2003 | The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +, |
| 2004 | *, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol |
| 2005 | operators, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 2006 | |
| 2007 | :let pascal_symbol_operator=1 |
| 2008 | |
| 2009 | Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: > |
| 2010 | |
| 2011 | :let pascal_no_functions=1 |
| 2012 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 996343d | 2010-07-04 22:20:21 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2013 | Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2014 | pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to |
| 2015 | match Turbo Pascal. > |
| 2016 | |
| 2017 | :let pascal_gpc=1 |
| 2018 | |
| 2019 | or > |
| 2020 | |
| 2021 | :let pascal_fpc=1 |
| 2022 | |
| 2023 | To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the |
| 2024 | pascal_one_line_string variable. > |
| 2025 | |
| 2026 | :let pascal_one_line_string=1 |
| 2027 | |
| 2028 | If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs |
| 2029 | will be highlighted as Error. > |
| 2030 | |
| 2031 | :let pascal_no_tabs=1 |
| 2032 | |
| 2033 | |
| 2034 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2035 | PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2036 | |
| 2037 | There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting. |
| 2038 | |
| 2039 | If you use POD files or POD segments, you might: > |
| 2040 | |
| 2041 | :let perl_include_pod = 1 |
| 2042 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2043 | The reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch |
| 2044 | off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2045 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2046 | To handle package references in variable and function names not differently |
| 2047 | from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2048 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2049 | :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2050 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2051 | (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables" |
| 2052 | enabled it.) |
| 2053 | |
| 2054 | If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: > |
| 2055 | |
| 2056 | :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1 |
| 2057 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 3fdfa4a | 2004-10-07 21:02:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2058 | (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2059 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2060 | The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be |
| 2061 | highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2062 | perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line. |
| 2063 | |
| 2064 | "hello world!"; qq|hello world|; |
| 2065 | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement) |
| 2066 | S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement) |
| 2067 | |
| 2068 | (^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all) |
| 2069 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2070 | The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2071 | synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly. |
| 2072 | If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2073 | then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2074 | out the line that causes the mistake. |
| 2075 | |
| 2076 | One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. > |
| 2077 | |
| 2078 | :let perl_no_sync_on_sub |
| 2079 | :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var |
| 2080 | |
| 2081 | Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for |
| 2082 | its attempts in syntax highlighting. > |
| 2083 | |
| 2084 | :let perl_sync_dist = 100 |
| 2085 | |
| 2086 | If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: > |
| 2087 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2088 | :let perl_fold = 1 |
| 2089 | |
| 2090 | If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: > |
| 2091 | |
| 2092 | :let perl_fold_blocks = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2093 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada17c | 2006-01-19 22:16:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2094 | To avoid folding packages or subs when perl_fold is let, let the appropriate |
| 2095 | variable(s): > |
| 2096 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2097 | :unlet perl_nofold_packages |
| 2098 | :unlet perl_nofold_subs |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada17c | 2006-01-19 22:16:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2099 | |
| 2100 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2101 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2102 | PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2103 | |
| 2104 | [note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4 |
| 2105 | it has been renamed to "php"] |
| 2106 | |
| 2107 | There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting. |
| 2108 | |
| 2109 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: > |
| 2110 | |
| 2111 | let php_sql_query = 1 |
| 2112 | |
| 2113 | For highlighting the Baselib methods: > |
| 2114 | |
| 2115 | let php_baselib = 1 |
| 2116 | |
| 2117 | Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: > |
| 2118 | |
| 2119 | let php_htmlInStrings = 1 |
| 2120 | |
| 2121 | Using the old colorstyle: > |
| 2122 | |
| 2123 | let php_oldStyle = 1 |
| 2124 | |
| 2125 | Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: > |
| 2126 | |
| 2127 | let php_asp_tags = 1 |
| 2128 | |
| 2129 | Disable short tags: > |
| 2130 | |
| 2131 | let php_noShortTags = 1 |
| 2132 | |
| 2133 | For highlighting parent error ] or ): > |
| 2134 | |
| 2135 | let php_parent_error_close = 1 |
| 2136 | |
| 2137 | For skipping an php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing |
| 2138 | one: > |
| 2139 | |
| 2140 | let php_parent_error_open = 1 |
| 2141 | |
| 2142 | Enable folding for classes and functions: > |
| 2143 | |
| 2144 | let php_folding = 1 |
| 2145 | |
| 2146 | Selecting syncing method: > |
| 2147 | |
| 2148 | let php_sync_method = x |
| 2149 | |
| 2150 | x = -1 to sync by search (default), |
| 2151 | x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards, |
| 2152 | x = 0 to sync from start. |
| 2153 | |
| 2154 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d2cec5b | 2006-03-28 21:08:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2155 | PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax* |
| 2156 | |
| 2157 | TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain" |
| 2158 | variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX, |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2159 | see |ft-tex-plugin|. |
Bram Moolenaar | d2cec5b | 2006-03-28 21:08:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2160 | |
| 2161 | This syntax file has the option > |
| 2162 | |
| 2163 | let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1 |
| 2164 | |
| 2165 | if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}". |
| 2166 | |
| 2167 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2168 | PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2169 | |
| 2170 | PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files |
| 2171 | |
| 2172 | This syntax file has the options: |
| 2173 | |
| 2174 | - ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2175 | definitions. Possible values are |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2176 | |
| 2177 | ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2178 | colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2179 | |
| 2180 | ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate |
| 2181 | statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line |
| 2182 | continuation symbols |
| 2183 | |
| 2184 | The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1. |
| 2185 | |
| 2186 | - ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal |
| 2187 | HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text. |
| 2188 | |
| 2189 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2190 | PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2191 | |
| 2192 | There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting. |
| 2193 | |
| 2194 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 2195 | |
| 2196 | :let phtml_sql_query = 1 |
| 2197 | |
| 2198 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 2199 | set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 2200 | |
| 2201 | :let phtml_minlines = 200 |
| 2202 | |
| 2203 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2204 | POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2205 | |
| 2206 | There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript. |
| 2207 | |
| 2208 | First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are |
| 2209 | currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original |
| 2210 | and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2. |
| 2211 | Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of |
| 2212 | extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest |
| 2213 | level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want |
| 2214 | highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: > |
| 2215 | |
| 2216 | :let postscr_level=2 |
| 2217 | |
| 2218 | If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is |
| 2219 | the most prevalent version currently. |
| 2220 | |
| 2221 | Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a |
| 2222 | particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of |
| 2223 | PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript! |
| 2224 | |
| 2225 | If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of |
| 2226 | Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as |
| 2227 | follows: > |
| 2228 | |
| 2229 | :let postscr_display=1 |
| 2230 | |
| 2231 | If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of |
| 2232 | Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable |
| 2233 | postscr_ghostscript as follows: > |
| 2234 | |
| 2235 | :let postscr_ghostscript=1 |
| 2236 | |
| 2237 | PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it |
| 2238 | useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can |
| 2239 | cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and |
| 2240 | character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working |
| 2241 | explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be |
| 2242 | highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: > |
| 2243 | |
| 2244 | :let postscr_fonts=1 |
| 2245 | :let postscr_encodings=1 |
| 2246 | |
| 2247 | There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In |
| 2248 | PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their |
| 2249 | operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators, |
| 2250 | if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical |
| 2251 | operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way |
| 2252 | or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be |
| 2253 | highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable |
| 2254 | postscr_andornot_binary as follows: > |
| 2255 | |
| 2256 | :let postscr_andornot_binary=1 |
| 2257 | < |
| 2258 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2259 | *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax* |
| 2260 | PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2261 | |
| 2262 | This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases. |
| 2263 | |
| 2264 | In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match |
| 2265 | the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns |
| 2266 | appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these |
| 2267 | patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or |
| 2268 | "term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap. |
| 2269 | |
| 2270 | For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap |
| 2271 | files, add the following: > |
| 2272 | |
| 2273 | :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" | |
| 2274 | \ set filetype=ptcap |
| 2275 | |
| 2276 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which |
| 2277 | are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines" |
| 2278 | internal variable to a larger number: > |
| 2279 | |
| 2280 | :let ptcap_minlines = 50 |
| 2281 | |
| 2282 | (The default is 20 lines.) |
| 2283 | |
| 2284 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2285 | PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2286 | |
| 2287 | Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection |
| 2288 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your |
| 2289 | startup vimrc: > |
| 2290 | :let filetype_w = "progress" |
| 2291 | The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be |
| 2292 | Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: > |
| 2293 | :let filetype_i = "progress" |
| 2294 | :let filetype_p = "progress" |
| 2295 | |
| 2296 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2297 | PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2298 | |
| 2299 | There are four options to control Python syntax highlighting. |
| 2300 | |
| 2301 | For highlighted numbers: > |
| 2302 | :let python_highlight_numbers = 1 |
| 2303 | |
| 2304 | For highlighted builtin functions: > |
| 2305 | :let python_highlight_builtins = 1 |
| 2306 | |
| 2307 | For highlighted standard exceptions: > |
| 2308 | :let python_highlight_exceptions = 1 |
| 2309 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 4a74803 | 2010-09-30 21:47:56 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2310 | For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2311 | :let python_highlight_space_errors = 1 |
| 2312 | |
| 2313 | If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the |
| 2314 | preceding three options): > |
| 2315 | :let python_highlight_all = 1 |
| 2316 | |
| 2317 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2318 | QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2319 | |
| 2320 | The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2321 | Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2322 | a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the |
| 2323 | syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2324 | users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2325 | can be set for the following effects: |
| 2326 | |
| 2327 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake: > |
| 2328 | :let quake_is_quake1 = 1 |
| 2329 | |
| 2330 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: > |
| 2331 | :let quake_is_quake2 = 1 |
| 2332 | |
| 2333 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: > |
| 2334 | :let quake_is_quake3 = 1 |
| 2335 | |
| 2336 | Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more |
| 2337 | commands than are actually available to you by the game. |
| 2338 | |
| 2339 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2340 | READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2341 | |
| 2342 | The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2343 | few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2344 | items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the |
| 2345 | command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: > |
| 2346 | let readline_has_bash = 1 |
| 2347 | |
| 2348 | This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and |
| 2349 | later, and part earlier) adds. |
| 2350 | |
| 2351 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2352 | REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2353 | |
| 2354 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2355 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable |
| 2356 | to a larger number: > |
| 2357 | :let rexx_minlines = 50 |
| 2358 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first |
| 2359 | displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 2360 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2361 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 9729301 | 2011-07-18 19:40:27 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2362 | Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from |
| 2363 | comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to |
| 2364 | your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r* |
| 2365 | > |
| 2366 | :let g:filetype_r = "r" |
| 2367 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2368 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2369 | RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2370 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2371 | There are a number of options to the Ruby syntax highlighting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2372 | |
| 2373 | By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2374 | of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2375 | experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support) |
| 2376 | you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2377 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2378 | :let ruby_no_expensive = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2379 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2380 | In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords. |
| 2381 | |
| 2382 | If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while |
| 2383 | scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting |
| 2384 | the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2385 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2386 | :let ruby_minlines = 100 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2387 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2388 | Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your |
| 2389 | largest class or module. |
| 2390 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2391 | Highlighting of special identifiers can be disabled by removing the |
| 2392 | rubyIdentifier highlighting: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2393 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2394 | :hi link rubyIdentifier NONE |
| 2395 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2396 | This will prevent highlighting of special identifiers like "ConstantName", |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2397 | "$global_var", "@@class_var", "@instance_var", "| block_param |", and |
| 2398 | ":symbol". |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2399 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2400 | Significant methods of Kernel, Module and Object are highlighted by default. |
| 2401 | This can be disabled by defining "ruby_no_special_methods": > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2402 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2403 | :let ruby_no_special_methods = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2404 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2405 | This will prevent highlighting of important methods such as "require", "attr", |
| 2406 | "private", "raise" and "proc". |
| 2407 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2408 | Ruby operators can be highlighted. This is enabled by defining |
| 2409 | "ruby_operators": > |
| 2410 | |
| 2411 | :let ruby_operators = 1 |
| 2412 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2413 | Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": > |
| 2414 | |
| 2415 | :let ruby_space_errors = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2416 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2417 | This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character |
| 2418 | as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and |
| 2419 | "ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after |
| 2420 | spaces respectively. |
| 2421 | |
| 2422 | Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": > |
| 2423 | |
| 2424 | :let ruby_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2425 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2426 | This will set the 'foldmethod' option to "syntax" and allow folding of |
| 2427 | classes, modules, methods, code blocks, heredocs and comments. |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2428 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2429 | Folding of multiline comments can be disabled by defining |
| 2430 | "ruby_no_comment_fold": > |
| 2431 | |
| 2432 | :let ruby_no_comment_fold = 1 |
| 2433 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2434 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2435 | SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 21cf823 | 2004-07-16 20:18:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2436 | |
| 2437 | By default only R5RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented. |
| 2438 | |
| 2439 | MzScheme-specific stuff will be used if b:is_mzscheme or g:is_mzscheme |
| 2440 | variables are defined. |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2441 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2442 | Also scheme.vim supports keywords of the Chicken Scheme->C compiler. Define |
| 2443 | b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them. |
Bram Moolenaar | 21cf823 | 2004-07-16 20:18:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2444 | |
| 2445 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2446 | SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2447 | |
| 2448 | The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many |
| 2449 | of them it's almost impossibly to cope. |
| 2450 | |
| 2451 | The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are |
| 2452 | case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2453 | used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2454 | highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: > |
| 2455 | :let sdl_2000=1 |
| 2456 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2457 | This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2458 | keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: > |
| 2459 | :let SDL_no_96=1 |
| 2460 | |
| 2461 | |
| 2462 | The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very |
| 2463 | satisfied with it for my own projects. |
| 2464 | |
| 2465 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2466 | SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2467 | |
| 2468 | To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo |
| 2469 | highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting > |
| 2470 | |
| 2471 | :let highlight_sedtabs = 1 |
| 2472 | |
| 2473 | in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs |
| 2474 | inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included |
| 2475 | by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is |
| 2476 | also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that, |
| 2477 | you can easily count the number of tabs in a string. |
| 2478 | |
| 2479 | Bugs: |
| 2480 | |
| 2481 | The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute |
| 2482 | command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned, |
| 2483 | transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong. |
| 2484 | (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the |
| 2485 | involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for |
| 2486 | each plausible pattern delimiter). |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2489 | SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2490 | |
| 2491 | The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows. |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 | The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. |
| 2494 | This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for |
| 2495 | closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are |
| 2496 | defined for you) |
| 2497 | |
| 2498 | Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag |
| 2499 | names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors. |
| 2500 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2501 | Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2502 | names are colored differently than unknown ones. |
| 2503 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2504 | Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2505 | are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal |
| 2506 | text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal> |
| 2507 | <replaceable> <ulink> and <link>. |
| 2508 | |
| 2509 | If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the |
| 2510 | following syntax groups: |
| 2511 | |
| 2512 | - sgmlBold |
| 2513 | - sgmlBoldItalic |
| 2514 | - sgmlUnderline |
| 2515 | - sgmlItalic |
| 2516 | - sgmlLink for links |
| 2517 | |
| 2518 | To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the |
| 2519 | following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files |
| 2520 | are read during initialization) > |
| 2521 | let sgml_my_rendering=1 |
| 2522 | |
| 2523 | You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your |
| 2524 | vimrc file: > |
| 2525 | let sgml_no_rendering=1 |
| 2526 | |
| 2527 | (Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>) |
| 2528 | |
| 2529 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2530 | SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2531 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2532 | This covers the "normal" Unix (Bourne) sh, bash and the Korn shell. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2533 | |
| 2534 | Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that |
| 2535 | various filenames are of specific types: > |
| 2536 | |
| 2537 | ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh |
| 2538 | bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash |
| 2539 | < |
| 2540 | If none of these cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined |
| 2541 | (ex. /bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, |
| 2542 | then that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to |
| 2543 | be shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2544 | sh is symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2545 | |
| 2546 | One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following three |
| 2547 | variables in your <.vimrc>: |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 | ksh: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2550 | let g:is_kornshell = 1 |
| 2551 | < posix: (using this is the same as setting is_kornshell to 1) > |
| 2552 | let g:is_posix = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2553 | < bash: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2554 | let g:is_bash = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2555 | < sh: (default) Bourne shell > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2556 | let g:is_sh = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2557 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2558 | If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a |
| 2559 | default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2560 | the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration |
| 2561 | statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the |
| 2562 | sh your system uses in your <.vimrc>. |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2563 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2564 | The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: > |
| 2565 | |
| 2566 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding) |
| 2567 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding) |
| 2568 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding) |
| 2569 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2570 | > |
| 2571 | then various syntax items (HereDocuments and function bodies) become |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2572 | syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together |
| 2573 | to get multiple types of folding: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2574 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2575 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding) |
| 2576 | |
| 2577 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed |
| 2578 | when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2579 | to a larger number. Example: > |
| 2580 | |
| 2581 | let sh_minlines = 500 |
| 2582 | |
| 2583 | This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first |
| 2584 | displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 2585 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2586 | |
| 2587 | If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To |
| 2588 | reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: > |
| 2589 | |
| 2590 | let sh_maxlines = 100 |
| 2591 | < |
| 2592 | The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to |
| 2593 | speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear. |
| 2594 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d960d76 | 2011-09-21 19:22:10 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2595 | *g:sh_isk* *g:sh_noisk* |
| 2596 | The shell languages appear to let "." be part of words, commands, etc; |
| 2597 | consequently it should be in the isk for sh.vim. As of v116 of syntax/sh.vim, |
| 2598 | syntax/sh.vim will append the "." to |'iskeyword'| by default; you may control |
| 2599 | this behavior with: > |
| 2600 | let g:sh_isk = '..whatever characters you want as part of iskeyword' |
| 2601 | let g:sh_noisk= 1 " otherwise, if this exists, the isk will NOT chg |
| 2602 | < |
| 2603 | *sh-embed* *sh-awk* |
| 2604 | Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2605 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d960d76 | 2011-09-21 19:22:10 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2606 | You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of |
| 2607 | Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following |
| 2608 | file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: > |
| 2609 | |
| 2610 | " AWK Embedding: {{{1 |
| 2611 | " ============== |
| 2612 | " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope. |
| 2613 | if exists("b:current_syntax") |
| 2614 | unlet b:current_syntax |
| 2615 | endif |
| 2616 | syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim |
| 2617 | syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained |
| 2618 | syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode |
| 2619 | syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded |
| 2620 | hi def link AWKCommand Type |
| 2621 | < |
| 2622 | This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: > |
| 2623 | awk '...awk code here...' |
| 2624 | be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be |
| 2625 | extended to other languages. |
| 2626 | |
| 2627 | |
| 2628 | SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax* |
| 2629 | (AspenTech plant simulator) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2630 | |
| 2631 | The Speedup syntax file has some options: |
| 2632 | |
| 2633 | - strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for |
| 2634 | sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not |
| 2635 | other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section). |
| 2636 | |
| 2637 | - highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types |
| 2638 | like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2639 | plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2640 | the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include |
| 2641 | them in the syntax file. |
| 2642 | |
| 2643 | - oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the |
| 2644 | highlighting of # style comments. |
| 2645 | |
| 2646 | oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even |
| 2647 | number of #s. |
| 2648 | |
| 2649 | oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2650 | error. This is the default setting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2651 | |
| 2652 | oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains |
| 2653 | more than one #. |
| 2654 | |
| 2655 | Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2656 | PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2657 | fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of |
| 2658 | the syntax file. |
| 2659 | |
| 2660 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2661 | SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax* |
| 2662 | *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2663 | *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2664 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2665 | While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own |
| 2666 | custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of |
| 2667 | SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2668 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2669 | Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax |
| 2670 | scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL |
| 2671 | supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a |
| 2672 | buffer by buffer basis. |
| 2673 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2674 | For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2675 | |
| 2676 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2677 | TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2678 | |
| 2679 | This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim| |
| 2680 | for how the filetype is detected. |
| 2681 | |
| 2682 | Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2683 | is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2684 | this line to your .vimrc: > |
| 2685 | |
| 2686 | :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0 |
| 2687 | |
| 2688 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2689 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable |
| 2690 | to a larger number: > |
| 2691 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 2692 | :let tcsh_minlines = 1000 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2693 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 2694 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first |
| 2695 | displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then |
| 2696 | synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for |
| 2697 | tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that |
| 2698 | redrawing can become slow. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2699 | |
| 2700 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2701 | TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2702 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2703 | *tex-folding* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2704 | Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2705 | |
| 2706 | As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters, |
| 2707 | sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put > |
| 2708 | let g:tex_fold_enabled=1 |
| 2709 | in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a |
| 2710 | modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: > |
| 2711 | % vim: fdm=syntax |
Bram Moolenaar | d960d76 | 2011-09-21 19:22:10 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2712 | If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into > |
Bram Moolenaar | 1514667 | 2011-10-20 22:22:38 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2713 | http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/Keep_folds_closed_while_inserting_text |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2714 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2715 | *tex-nospell* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2716 | Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2717 | |
| 2718 | Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would |
| 2719 | prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do |
| 2720 | this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > |
| 2721 | let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1 |
| 2722 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 74cbdf0 | 2010-08-04 23:03:17 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2723 | *tex-verb* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2724 | Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 74cbdf0 | 2010-08-04 23:03:17 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2725 | |
| 2726 | Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does |
| 2727 | one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do |
| 2728 | want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: > |
| 2729 | let g:tex_verbspell= 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2730 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2731 | *tex-runon* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2732 | Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2733 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2734 | The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The |
| 2735 | highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and |
| 2736 | texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones |
| 2737 | terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized |
| 2738 | as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2739 | special "TeX comment" has been provided > |
| 2740 | %stopzone |
| 2741 | which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a |
| 2742 | texMathZone. |
| 2743 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2744 | *tex-slow* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2745 | Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2746 | |
| 2747 | If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for > |
| 2748 | :syn sync maxlines=200 |
| 2749 | :syn sync minlines=50 |
| 2750 | (especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2751 | increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2752 | if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?). |
| 2753 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d960d76 | 2011-09-21 19:22:10 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2754 | Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see |
| 2755 | |tex-folding| for a way around this. |
| 2756 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2757 | *tex-morecommands* *tex-package* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2758 | Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2759 | |
| 2760 | LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full |
| 2761 | of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a |
| 2762 | package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support |
| 2763 | it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the |
| 2764 | techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided |
Bram Moolenaar | b6b046b | 2011-12-30 13:11:27 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 2765 | by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write, |
| 2766 | which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to |
| 2767 | http://vim.sf.net/. |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2768 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2769 | *tex-error* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2770 | Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2771 | |
| 2772 | The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus, |
| 2773 | although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate |
| 2774 | errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you, |
| 2775 | you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: > |
| 2776 | let tex_no_error=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2777 | and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2778 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2779 | *tex-math* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2780 | Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2781 | |
| 2782 | If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following |
| 2783 | code shows you an example as to how you might do so: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2784 | call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform) |
| 2785 | You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix |
| 2786 | (currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself). |
| 2787 | As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: > |
| 2788 | call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1) |
| 2789 | You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group, |
| 2790 | and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim. |
| 2791 | The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group |
| 2792 | has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2793 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2794 | *tex-style* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2795 | Tex: Starting a New Style? ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2796 | |
| 2797 | One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in |
| 2798 | commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the |
| 2799 | following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag |
| 2800 | such use of @ as an error. To solve this: > |
| 2801 | |
| 2802 | :let b:tex_stylish = 1 |
| 2803 | :set ft=tex |
| 2804 | |
| 2805 | Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim> |
| 2806 | always accept such use of @. |
| 2807 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 611df5b | 2010-07-26 22:51:56 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2808 | *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal* |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2809 | Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 611df5b | 2010-07-26 22:51:56 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2810 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 477db06 | 2010-07-28 18:17:41 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2811 | If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a |
| 2812 | number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs, |
| 2813 | including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and |
| 2814 | superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into |
| 2815 | superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports. |
| 2816 | In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts. |
| 2817 | |
| 2818 | One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one |
| 2819 | with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 611df5b | 2010-07-26 22:51:56 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2820 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc0c06 | 2010-08-10 21:43:35 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2821 | *g:tex_conceal* |
| 2822 | Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~ |
| 2823 | |
| 2824 | You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your |
| 2825 | <.vimrc>. By default it is set to "admgs" to enable conceal for the |
| 2826 | following sets of characters: > |
| 2827 | |
| 2828 | a = accents/ligatures |
| 2829 | d = delimiters |
| 2830 | m = math symbols |
| 2831 | g = Greek |
| 2832 | s = superscripts/subscripts |
| 2833 | < |
| 2834 | By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character |
| 2835 | substitution will not be made. |
| 2836 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2837 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2838 | TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2839 | |
| 2840 | There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting. |
| 2841 | |
| 2842 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 2843 | set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 2844 | |
| 2845 | :let tf_minlines = your choice |
| 2846 | |
| 2847 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2848 | VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax* |
| 2849 | *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines* |
Bram Moolenaar | 996343d | 2010-07-04 22:20:21 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 2850 | There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2851 | updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the |
| 2852 | g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to |
| 2853 | improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2854 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2855 | g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines |
| 2856 | g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines |
| 2857 | < |
| 2858 | (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of |
| 2859 | these two options) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2860 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2861 | *g:vimsyn_embed* |
| 2862 | The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of |
| 2863 | embedded script highlighting they wish to have. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2864 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2865 | g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't embed any scripts |
| 2866 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : embed mzscheme (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2867 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : embed perl (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2868 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : embed python (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2869 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : embed ruby (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2870 | g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : embed tcl (but only if vim supports it) |
| 2871 | < |
| 2872 | By default, g:vimsyn_embed is "mpPr"; ie. syntax/vim.vim will support |
| 2873 | highlighting mzscheme, perl, python, and ruby by default. Vim's has("tcl") |
| 2874 | test appears to hang vim when tcl is not truly available. Thus, by default, |
| 2875 | tcl is not supported for embedding (but those of you who like tcl embedded in |
| 2876 | their vim syntax highlighting can simply include it in the g:vimembedscript |
| 2877 | option). |
| 2878 | *g:vimsyn_folding* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2879 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2880 | Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2881 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2882 | g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding |
| 2883 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups |
| 2884 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions |
| 2885 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script |
| 2886 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script |
| 2887 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script |
| 2888 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script |
| 2889 | g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2890 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2891 | *g:vimsyn_noerror* |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2892 | Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; VimL is a |
| 2893 | difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2894 | highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2895 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2896 | let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1 |
| 2897 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2898 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2899 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2900 | XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2901 | |
| 2902 | The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both |
| 2903 | variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect. |
| 2904 | You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable |
| 2905 | xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in |
| 2906 | your .vimrc. Example: > |
| 2907 | :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3 |
| 2908 | When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable. |
| 2909 | |
| 2910 | Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use |
| 2911 | "SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name |
| 2912 | highlighted. |
| 2913 | |
| 2914 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2915 | XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2916 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2917 | Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2918 | setting a global variable: > |
| 2919 | |
| 2920 | :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1 |
| 2921 | < |
| 2922 | *xml-folding* |
| 2923 | The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2924 | start and end tags. This can be turned on by > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2925 | |
| 2926 | :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1 |
| 2927 | :set foldmethod=syntax |
| 2928 | |
| 2929 | Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, |
| 2930 | especially for large files. |
| 2931 | |
| 2932 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2933 | X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2934 | |
| 2935 | xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the |
| 2936 | XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings, |
| 2937 | you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm". |
| 2938 | |
| 2939 | To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it |
| 2940 | somewhere else with "P". |
| 2941 | |
| 2942 | Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: > |
| 2943 | :function! GetPixel() |
Bram Moolenaar | 61660ea | 2006-04-07 21:40:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2944 | : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2945 | : echo c |
| 2946 | : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c |
| 2947 | : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c |
| 2948 | :endfunction |
| 2949 | :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR> |
| 2950 | :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor |
| 2951 | This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen. |
| 2952 | It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you |
| 2953 | must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it. |
| 2954 | |
| 2955 | It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: > |
| 2956 | :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-* |
| 2957 | |
| 2958 | ============================================================================== |
| 2959 | 5. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410* |
| 2960 | |
| 2961 | Vim understands three types of syntax items: |
| 2962 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2963 | 1. Keyword |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2964 | It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword' |
| 2965 | option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a |
| 2966 | complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match). |
| 2967 | The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because |
| 2968 | "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is. |
| 2969 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2970 | 2. Match |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2971 | This is a match with a single regexp pattern. |
| 2972 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2973 | 3. Region |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2974 | This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match |
| 2975 | with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A |
| 2976 | "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern. |
| 2977 | |
| 2978 | Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group |
| 2979 | you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item |
| 2980 | to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment, |
| 2981 | and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a |
| 2982 | "Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make |
| 2983 | one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group. |
| 2984 | This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting |
| 2985 | each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting |
| 2986 | for a lot of groups. |
| 2987 | |
| 2988 | Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight |
| 2989 | group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used |
| 2990 | for the syntax group with the same name. |
| 2991 | |
| 2992 | In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was |
| 2993 | defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by |
| 2994 | using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a |
| 2995 | match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a |
| 2996 | keyword with ignoring case. |
| 2997 | |
| 2998 | |
| 2999 | PRIORITY *:syn-priority* |
| 3000 | |
| 3001 | When several syntax items may match, these rules are used: |
| 3002 | |
| 3003 | 1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item |
| 3004 | defined last has priority. |
| 3005 | 2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items. |
| 3006 | 3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that |
| 3007 | start in later positions. |
| 3008 | |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 | DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390* |
| 3011 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3012 | :sy[ntax] case [match | ignore] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3013 | This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with |
| 3014 | matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using |
| 3015 | "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all |
| 3016 | items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected. |
| 3017 | |
| 3018 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3019 | SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell* |
| 3020 | |
| 3021 | :sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default] |
| 3022 | This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not |
| 3023 | in a syntax item: |
| 3024 | |
| 3025 | toplevel: Text is spell checked. |
| 3026 | notoplevel: Text is not spell checked. |
| 3027 | default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking. |
| 3028 | |
| 3029 | For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters |
| 3030 | |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then |
| 3031 | spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel". |
| 3032 | |
| 3033 | To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set. |
| 3034 | |
| 3035 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3036 | DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword* |
| 3037 | |
| 3038 | :sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}] |
| 3039 | |
| 3040 | This defines a number of keywords. |
| 3041 | |
| 3042 | {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 3043 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 3044 | {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group. |
| 3045 | |
| 3046 | Example: > |
| 3047 | :syntax keyword Type int long char |
| 3048 | < |
| 3049 | The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to |
| 3050 | all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword. |
| 3051 | These examples do exactly the same: > |
| 3052 | :syntax keyword Type contained int long char |
| 3053 | :syntax keyword Type int long contained char |
| 3054 | :syntax keyword Type int long char contained |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3055 | < *E789* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3056 | When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in |
| 3057 | Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the |
| 3058 | variations at once: > |
| 3059 | :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext] |
| 3060 | < |
| 3061 | Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the |
| 3062 | characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character |
| 3063 | isn't, the keyword will never be recognized. |
| 3064 | Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in |
| 3065 | 'iskeyword'. |
| 3066 | |
| 3067 | A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the |
| 3068 | keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest |
| 3069 | and a keyword can't contain anything else. |
| 3070 | |
| 3071 | Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even |
| 3072 | one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match |
| 3073 | instead. |
| 3074 | |
| 3075 | The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters. |
| 3076 | |
| 3077 | The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment |
| 3078 | differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained |
| 3079 | and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3080 | highlight group. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3081 | :syn keyword vimCommand tag |
| 3082 | :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag |
| 3083 | < When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand" |
| 3084 | highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that |
| 3085 | contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used. |
| 3086 | |
| 3087 | |
| 3088 | DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match* |
| 3089 | |
| 3090 | :sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}] [excludenl] {pattern} [{options}] |
| 3091 | |
| 3092 | This defines one match. |
| 3093 | |
| 3094 | {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 3095 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 3096 | [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" |
| 3097 | extend a containing match or region. Must be |
| 3098 | given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl| |
| 3099 | {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match. |
| 3100 | See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 3101 | Note that the pattern may match more than one |
| 3102 | line, which makes the match depend on where |
| 3103 | Vim starts searching for the pattern. You |
| 3104 | need to make sure syncing takes care of this. |
| 3105 | |
| 3106 | Example (match a character constant): > |
| 3107 | :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1 |
| 3108 | < |
| 3109 | |
| 3110 | DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end* |
| 3111 | *E398* *E399* |
| 3112 | :sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}] |
| 3113 | [matchgroup={group-name}] |
| 3114 | [keepend] |
| 3115 | [extend] |
| 3116 | [excludenl] |
| 3117 | start={start_pattern} .. |
| 3118 | [skip={skip_pattern}] |
| 3119 | end={end_pattern} .. |
| 3120 | [{options}] |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 | This defines one region. It may span several lines. |
| 3123 | |
| 3124 | {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 3125 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 3126 | [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following |
| 3127 | start or end pattern matches only. Not used |
| 3128 | for the text in between the matched start and |
| 3129 | end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using |
| 3130 | a different group for the start or end match. |
| 3131 | See |:syn-matchgroup|. |
| 3132 | keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a |
| 3133 | match with the end pattern. See |
| 3134 | |:syn-keepend|. |
| 3135 | extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3136 | is contained in. See |:syn-extend|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3137 | excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" |
| 3138 | extend a containing match or item. Only |
| 3139 | useful for end patterns. Must be given before |
| 3140 | the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl| |
| 3141 | start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of |
| 3142 | the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 3143 | skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside |
| 3144 | the region where not to look for the end |
| 3145 | pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 3146 | end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of |
| 3147 | the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 3148 | |
| 3149 | Example: > |
| 3150 | :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ |
| 3151 | < |
| 3152 | The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order. |
| 3153 | There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more |
| 3154 | start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip |
| 3155 | pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It |
| 3156 | is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign |
| 3157 | (although it mostly looks better without white space). |
| 3158 | |
| 3159 | When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these |
| 3160 | is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start |
| 3161 | patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for |
| 3162 | the end patterns. |
| 3163 | |
| 3164 | The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern. |
| 3165 | Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the |
| 3166 | end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern. |
| 3167 | |
| 3168 | The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the |
| 3169 | search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what |
| 3170 | you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in |
| 3171 | the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble. |
| 3172 | |
| 3173 | Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start |
| 3174 | pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT |
| 3175 | work: > |
| 3176 | :syn region First start="(" end=":" |
| 3177 | :syn region Second start="(" end=";" |
| 3178 | < The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has |
| 3179 | higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next |
| 3180 | ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: > |
| 3181 | :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:" |
| 3182 | :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};" |
| 3183 | < This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and |
| 3184 | repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible). |
| 3185 | |
| 3186 | *:syn-keepend* |
| 3187 | By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern. |
| 3188 | This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with |
| 3189 | "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}" |
| 3190 | will then end the contained region, but not the outer region: |
| 3191 | { starts outer "{}" region |
| 3192 | { starts contained "{}" region |
| 3193 | } ends contained "{}" region |
| 3194 | } ends outer "{} region |
| 3195 | If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching |
| 3196 | of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item. |
| 3197 | This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for |
| 3198 | contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing |
| 3199 | that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: > |
| 3200 | :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+ |
| 3201 | :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend |
| 3202 | < The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line, |
| 3203 | even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>. |
| 3204 | |
| 3205 | When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried |
| 3206 | after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first |
| 3207 | encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any |
| 3208 | contained matches. |
| 3209 | *:syn-extend* |
| 3210 | The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument. |
| 3211 | When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses |
| 3212 | "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be |
| 3213 | extended. |
| 3214 | This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while |
| 3215 | others don't. Example: > |
| 3216 | |
| 3217 | :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript |
| 3218 | :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained |
| 3219 | :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend |
| 3220 | |
| 3221 | < Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue |
| 3222 | further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript |
| 3223 | item does extend the htmlRef item. |
| 3224 | |
| 3225 | Another example: > |
| 3226 | :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend |
| 3227 | < This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be |
| 3228 | changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to |
| 3229 | highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it |
| 3230 | includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested |
| 3231 | region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in. |
| 3232 | |
| 3233 | *:syn-excludenl* |
| 3234 | When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$' |
| 3235 | to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is |
| 3236 | contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with |
| 3237 | "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue |
| 3238 | that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default |
| 3239 | behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it: |
| 3240 | 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all |
| 3241 | contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be |
| 3242 | used when all contained items must not extend the containing item. |
| 3243 | 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match |
| 3244 | from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if |
| 3245 | only some contained items must not extend the containing item. |
| 3246 | "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to. |
| 3247 | |
| 3248 | *:syn-matchgroup* |
| 3249 | "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern |
| 3250 | differently than the body of the region. Example: > |
| 3251 | :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ |
| 3252 | < This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in |
| 3253 | between with the "String" group. |
| 3254 | The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow, |
| 3255 | until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not |
| 3256 | using a matchgroup. |
| 3257 | |
| 3258 | In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the |
| 3259 | contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid |
| 3260 | that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When |
| 3261 | using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern |
| 3262 | match that is highlighted with "matchgroup". |
| 3263 | |
| 3264 | Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in |
| 3265 | different colors: > |
| 3266 | :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2 |
| 3267 | :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained |
| 3268 | :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained |
| 3269 | :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red |
| 3270 | :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue |
| 3271 | :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen |
Bram Moolenaar | adc2182 | 2011-04-01 18:03:16 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3272 | < |
| 3273 | *E849* |
| 3274 | The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3275 | |
| 3276 | ============================================================================== |
| 3277 | 6. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments* |
| 3278 | |
| 3279 | The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments. |
| 3280 | The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order |
| 3281 | and may be mixed with patterns. |
| 3282 | |
| 3283 | Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments |
| 3284 | can not be used for all commands: |
Bram Moolenaar | 0909215 | 2010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3285 | *E395* |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3286 | contains oneline fold display extend concealends~ |
| 3287 | :syntax keyword - - - - - - |
| 3288 | :syntax match yes - yes yes yes - |
| 3289 | :syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3290 | |
| 3291 | These arguments can be used for all three commands: |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3292 | conceal |
| 3293 | cchar |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3294 | contained |
| 3295 | containedin |
| 3296 | nextgroup |
| 3297 | transparent |
| 3298 | skipwhite |
| 3299 | skipnl |
| 3300 | skipempty |
| 3301 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3302 | conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal* |
| 3303 | |
| 3304 | When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable. |
Bram Moolenaar | 370df58 | 2010-06-22 05:16:38 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3305 | Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the |
Bram Moolenaar | f5963f7 | 2010-07-23 22:10:27 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3306 | 'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether |
| 3307 | concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to |
| 3308 | edit the line. |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3309 | |
| 3310 | concealends *:syn-concealends* |
| 3311 | |
| 3312 | When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of |
| 3313 | the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable. |
| 3314 | Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the |
| 3315 | 'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately |
| 3316 | in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup" |
| 3317 | |
| 3318 | cchar *:syn-cchar* |
Bram Moolenaar | d58e929 | 2011-02-09 17:07:58 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3319 | *E844* |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3320 | The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item |
| 3321 | when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal |
| 3322 | argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal |
Bram Moolenaar | d58e929 | 2011-02-09 17:07:58 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3323 | character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be |
| 3324 | a control character such as Tab. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3325 | :syntax match Entity "&" conceal cchar=& |
Bram Moolenaar | 9028b10 | 2010-07-11 16:58:51 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3326 | See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3327 | |
| 3328 | contained *:syn-contained* |
| 3329 | |
| 3330 | When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at |
| 3331 | the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of |
| 3332 | another match. Example: > |
| 3333 | :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained |
| 3334 | :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo |
| 3335 | |
| 3336 | |
| 3337 | display *:syn-display* |
| 3338 | |
| 3339 | If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the |
| 3340 | detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting, |
| 3341 | by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is |
| 3342 | to be displayed. |
| 3343 | |
| 3344 | Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these |
| 3345 | conditions: |
| 3346 | - The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region |
| 3347 | for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next |
| 3348 | line. |
| 3349 | - The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or |
| 3350 | make it continue on the next line. |
| 3351 | - The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example |
| 3352 | for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display", |
| 3353 | because it may make that preprocessor match shorter. |
| 3354 | - The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise, |
| 3355 | and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a |
| 3356 | "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would |
| 3357 | match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line. |
| 3358 | |
| 3359 | Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used: |
| 3360 | - match with a number |
| 3361 | - match with a label |
| 3362 | |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 | transparent *:syn-transparent* |
| 3365 | |
| 3366 | If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted |
| 3367 | itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This |
| 3368 | is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used |
| 3369 | only to skip over a part of the text. |
| 3370 | |
| 3371 | The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in, |
| 3372 | unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To |
| 3373 | avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which |
| 3374 | highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": > |
| 3375 | :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim |
| 3376 | :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained |
| 3377 | :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE |
| 3378 | :hi link myString String |
| 3379 | :hi link myWord Comment |
| 3380 | Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last |
| 3381 | match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent" |
| 3382 | argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But |
| 3383 | it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left |
| 3384 | out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow |
| 3385 | "myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This |
| 3386 | happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same |
| 3387 | position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here. |
| 3388 | |
| 3389 | When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained |
| 3390 | items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you |
| 3391 | see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look |
| 3392 | through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture: |
| 3393 | |
| 3394 | look from here |
| 3395 | |
| 3396 | | | | | | | |
| 3397 | V V V V V V |
| 3398 | |
| 3399 | xxxx yyy more contained items |
| 3400 | .................... contained item (transparent) |
| 3401 | ============================= first item |
| 3402 | |
| 3403 | The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a |
| 3404 | transparent group. |
| 3405 | |
| 3406 | What you see is: |
| 3407 | |
| 3408 | =======xxxx=======yyy======== |
| 3409 | |
| 3410 | Thus you look through the transparent "....". |
| 3411 | |
| 3412 | |
| 3413 | oneline *:syn-oneline* |
| 3414 | |
| 3415 | The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line |
| 3416 | boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the |
| 3417 | region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on |
| 3418 | the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line |
| 3419 | continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first |
| 3420 | line, otherwise the region doesn't even start. |
| 3421 | |
| 3422 | When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end |
| 3423 | pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The |
| 3424 | end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument |
| 3425 | means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must |
| 3426 | be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a |
| 3427 | line break. |
| 3428 | |
| 3429 | |
| 3430 | fold *:syn-fold* |
| 3431 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3432 | The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3433 | Example: > |
| 3434 | :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold |
| 3435 | :syn sync fromstart |
| 3436 | :set foldmethod=syntax |
| 3437 | This will make each {} block form one fold. |
| 3438 | |
| 3439 | The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item |
| 3440 | ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold. |
| 3441 | The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds. |
| 3442 | {not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} |
| 3443 | |
| 3444 | |
| 3445 | *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409* |
| 3446 | contains={groupname},.. |
| 3447 | |
| 3448 | The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These |
| 3449 | groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the |
| 3450 | containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and |
| 3451 | regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in |
| 3452 | this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used |
| 3453 | here. |
| 3454 | |
| 3455 | contains=ALL |
| 3456 | If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all |
| 3457 | groups will be accepted inside the item. |
| 3458 | |
| 3459 | contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},.. |
| 3460 | If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all |
| 3461 | groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that |
| 3462 | are listed. Example: > |
| 3463 | :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function |
| 3464 | |
| 3465 | contains=TOP |
| 3466 | If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all |
| 3467 | groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained" |
| 3468 | argument. |
| 3469 | contains=TOP,{group-name},.. |
| 3470 | Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed. |
| 3471 | |
| 3472 | contains=CONTAINED |
| 3473 | If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then |
| 3474 | all groups will be accepted that have the "contained" |
| 3475 | argument. |
| 3476 | contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},.. |
| 3477 | Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are |
| 3478 | listed. |
| 3479 | |
| 3480 | |
| 3481 | The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names |
| 3482 | that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used). |
| 3483 | The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: > |
| 3484 | ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3] |
| 3485 | The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups |
| 3486 | that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax |
| 3487 | command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting |
| 3488 | syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because |
| 3489 | the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the |
| 3490 | group names. |
| 3491 | |
| 3492 | The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a |
| 3493 | region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used |
| 3494 | |:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the |
| 3495 | region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the |
| 3496 | area that is highlighted |
| 3497 | |
| 3498 | |
| 3499 | containedin={groupname}... *:syn-containedin* |
| 3500 | |
| 3501 | The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The |
| 3502 | item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the |
| 3503 | containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item. |
| 3504 | |
| 3505 | The {groupname}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above. |
| 3506 | |
| 3507 | This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to |
| 3508 | be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition |
| 3509 | of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading |
| 3510 | the C syntax: > |
| 3511 | :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained |
| 3512 | Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top |
| 3513 | level. |
| 3514 | |
| 3515 | Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can |
| 3516 | appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that |
| 3517 | keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't |
| 3518 | work. |
| 3519 | |
| 3520 | |
| 3521 | nextgroup={groupname},.. *:syn-nextgroup* |
| 3522 | |
| 3523 | The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names, |
| 3524 | separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns). |
| 3525 | |
| 3526 | If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be |
| 3527 | tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have |
| 3528 | a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group |
| 3529 | will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the |
| 3530 | current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all |
| 3531 | other groups. Example: > |
| 3532 | :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo |
| 3533 | :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller |
| 3534 | :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained |
| 3535 | |
| 3536 | This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a |
| 3537 | "Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for |
| 3538 | highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. > |
| 3539 | |
| 3540 | Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf |
| 3541 | fff bbb fff bbb |
| 3542 | |
| 3543 | Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar. |
| 3544 | when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be |
| 3545 | highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match |
| 3546 | would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|). |
| 3547 | |
| 3548 | |
| 3549 | skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite* |
| 3550 | skipnl *:syn-skipnl* |
| 3551 | skipempty *:syn-skipempty* |
| 3552 | |
| 3553 | These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be |
| 3554 | used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text: |
Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3555 | skipwhite skip over space and tab characters |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3556 | skipnl skip over the end of a line |
| 3557 | skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl") |
| 3558 | |
| 3559 | When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no |
| 3560 | next group that matches the white space. |
| 3561 | |
| 3562 | When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next |
| 3563 | line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current |
| 3564 | line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after |
| 3565 | the current item in the same line. |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 | When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other |
| 3568 | groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried |
| 3569 | for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white |
| 3570 | space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items. |
| 3571 | |
| 3572 | Example: > |
| 3573 | :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty |
| 3574 | :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained |
| 3575 | :syn match ifline "endif" contained |
| 3576 | Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also |
| 3577 | match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes |
| 3578 | precedence. |
| 3579 | Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add |
| 3580 | "contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the |
| 3581 | example). |
| 3582 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3583 | IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit* |
| 3584 | |
| 3585 | :sy[ntax] conceal [on|off] |
| 3586 | This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords, |
| 3587 | matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal |
| 3588 | on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region" |
| 3589 | defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal |
| 3590 | off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be |
| 3591 | given explicitly. |
| 3592 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3593 | ============================================================================== |
| 3594 | 7. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402* |
| 3595 | |
| 3596 | In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical |
| 3597 | characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to |
| 3598 | use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can |
| 3599 | use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: > |
| 3600 | :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/" |
| 3601 | :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+ |
| 3602 | |
| 3603 | See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3604 | always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3605 | value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is |
| 3606 | not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and |
| 3607 | independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings. |
| 3608 | |
| 3609 | Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*". |
| 3610 | This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere. |
| 3611 | |
| 3612 | *:syn-pattern-offset* |
| 3613 | The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to |
| 3614 | change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the |
| 3615 | match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both |
| 3616 | are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip |
| 3617 | pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern. |
| 3618 | |
| 3619 | The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}" |
| 3620 | The {what} can be one of seven strings: |
| 3621 | |
| 3622 | ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text |
| 3623 | me Match End offset for the end of the matched text |
| 3624 | hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts |
| 3625 | he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends |
| 3626 | rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts |
| 3627 | re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends |
| 3628 | lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern |
| 3629 | |
| 3630 | The {offset} can be: |
| 3631 | |
| 3632 | s start of the matched pattern |
| 3633 | s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right |
| 3634 | s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left |
| 3635 | e end of the matched pattern |
| 3636 | e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right |
| 3637 | e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left |
| 3638 | {nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars to the left |
| 3639 | |
| 3640 | Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3". |
| 3641 | |
| 3642 | Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always |
| 3643 | meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used: |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 | ms me hs he rs re lc ~ |
| 3646 | match item yes yes yes yes - - yes |
| 3647 | region item start yes - yes - yes - yes |
| 3648 | region item skip - yes - - - - yes |
| 3649 | region item end - yes - yes - yes yes |
| 3650 | |
| 3651 | Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: > |
| 3652 | :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1 |
| 3653 | < |
| 3654 | some "string" text |
| 3655 | ^^^^^^ highlighted |
| 3656 | |
| 3657 | Notes: |
| 3658 | - There must be no white space between the pattern and the character |
| 3659 | offset(s). |
| 3660 | - The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. |
| 3661 | - A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end |
| 3662 | pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3663 | - Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters. |
| 3664 | This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the |
| 3665 | Vim 7.2 release. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3666 | - The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern |
| 3667 | matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting |
| 3668 | start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. |
| 3669 | |
| 3670 | Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): > |
| 3671 | :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1 |
| 3672 | < |
| 3673 | /* this is a comment */ |
| 3674 | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted |
| 3675 | |
| 3676 | A more complicated Example: > |
| 3677 | :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1 |
| 3678 | < |
| 3679 | abcfoostringbarabc |
| 3680 | mmmmmmmmmmm match |
Bram Moolenaar | 4770d09 | 2006-01-12 23:22:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3681 | sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar") |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3682 | |
| 3683 | Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context* |
| 3684 | |
| 3685 | Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility |
| 3686 | with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct |
| 3687 | in the pattern. |
| 3688 | |
| 3689 | The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must |
| 3690 | be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will |
| 3691 | cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing |
| 3692 | characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be |
| 3693 | used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to |
| 3694 | specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: > |
| 3695 | |
| 3696 | :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1 |
| 3697 | :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1 |
| 3698 | :syn match Underline "_\+" |
| 3699 | < |
| 3700 | ___zzzz ___wwww |
| 3701 | ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline |
| 3702 | ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash |
| 3703 | ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash |
| 3704 | |
| 3705 | The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset, |
| 3706 | unless you set "ms" explicitly. |
| 3707 | |
| 3708 | |
| 3709 | Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line* |
| 3710 | |
| 3711 | The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as |
| 3712 | expected, but there are a few exceptions. |
| 3713 | |
| 3714 | When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not |
| 3715 | allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3716 | following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of |
| 3717 | the match doesn't move to another line. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3718 | |
| 3719 | The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will |
| 3720 | continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is |
| 3721 | matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line |
| 3722 | halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a |
| 3723 | previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern |
| 3724 | is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: > |
| 3725 | x x a |
| 3726 | b x x |
| 3727 | Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters |
| 3728 | after the "\n". |
| 3729 | |
| 3730 | |
| 3731 | External matches *:syn-ext-match* |
| 3732 | |
| 3733 | These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns: |
| 3734 | |
| 3735 | */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* |
| 3736 | \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it is can |
| 3737 | be accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable |
| 3738 | in defining a syntax region start pattern. |
| 3739 | |
| 3740 | */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5* |
| 3741 | \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67* |
| 3742 | Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding |
| 3743 | sub-expression in a previous start pattern match. |
| 3744 | |
| 3745 | Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common |
| 3746 | sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix |
| 3747 | shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression |
| 3748 | items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be |
| 3749 | referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document |
| 3750 | example, for instance, can be done like this: > |
| 3751 | :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$" |
| 3752 | |
| 3753 | As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern, |
| 3754 | it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it |
| 3755 | changes the \1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the |
| 3756 | first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can |
| 3757 | also be used in skip patterns: > |
| 3758 | :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1" |
| 3759 | |
| 3760 | Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and |
| 3761 | indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied |
| 3762 | to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa". |
| 3763 | Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references |
| 3764 | within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one |
| 3765 | sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest |
| 3766 | the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)". |
| 3767 | |
| 3768 | Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches |
| 3769 | cannot be referred to. |
| 3770 | |
| 3771 | ============================================================================== |
| 3772 | 8. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400* |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 | :sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..] |
| 3775 | [add={group-name}..] |
| 3776 | [remove={group-name}..] |
| 3777 | |
| 3778 | This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a |
| 3779 | single name. |
| 3780 | |
| 3781 | contains={group-name}.. |
| 3782 | The cluster is set to the specified list of groups. |
| 3783 | add={group-name}.. |
| 3784 | The specified groups are added to the cluster. |
| 3785 | remove={group-name}.. |
| 3786 | The specified groups are removed from the cluster. |
| 3787 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3788 | A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=.., |
| 3789 | nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use |
| 3790 | this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3791 | |
| 3792 | Example: > |
| 3793 | :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers |
| 3794 | :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2 |
| 3795 | |
| 3796 | As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively |
| 3797 | retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so |
| 3798 | to speak: > |
| 3799 | :syntax keyword A aaa |
| 3800 | :syntax keyword B bbb |
| 3801 | :syntax cluster AandB contains=A |
| 3802 | :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB |
| 3803 | :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff |
| 3804 | |
| 3805 | This also has implications for nested clusters: > |
| 3806 | :syntax keyword A aaa |
| 3807 | :syntax keyword B bbb |
| 3808 | :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B |
| 3809 | :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup |
| 3810 | :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup |
| 3811 | :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup |
| 3812 | :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff |
Bram Moolenaar | adc2182 | 2011-04-01 18:03:16 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3813 | < |
| 3814 | *E848* |
| 3815 | The maximum number of clusters is 9767. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3816 | |
| 3817 | ============================================================================== |
| 3818 | 9. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397* |
| 3819 | |
| 3820 | It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for |
| 3821 | a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in |
| 3822 | two different ways: |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 | - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be |
| 3825 | allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use |
| 3826 | the |:runtime| command: > |
| 3827 | |
| 3828 | " In cpp.vim: |
| 3829 | :runtime! syntax/c.vim |
| 3830 | :unlet b:current_syntax |
| 3831 | |
| 3832 | < - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be |
| 3833 | contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the |
| 3834 | ":syntax include" command: |
| 3835 | |
| 3836 | :sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name} |
| 3837 | |
| 3838 | All syntax items declared in the included file will have the |
| 3839 | "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified, |
| 3840 | all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to |
| 3841 | that list. > |
| 3842 | |
| 3843 | " In perl.vim: |
| 3844 | :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim |
| 3845 | :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod |
| 3846 | < |
| 3847 | When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR" |
| 3848 | or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path |
| 3849 | (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'. |
| 3850 | All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is |
| 3851 | recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file |
| 3852 | with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn |
| 3853 | include". |
| 3854 | |
Bram Moolenaar | adc2182 | 2011-04-01 18:03:16 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 3855 | *E847* |
| 3856 | The maximum number of includes is 999. |
| 3857 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3858 | ============================================================================== |
| 3859 | 10. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404* |
| 3860 | |
| 3861 | Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To |
| 3862 | make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where |
| 3863 | redrawing starts. |
| 3864 | |
| 3865 | :sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...] |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 | There are four ways to synchronize: |
| 3868 | 1. Always parse from the start of the file. |
| 3869 | |:syn-sync-first| |
| 3870 | 2. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can |
| 3871 | figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment. |
| 3872 | |:syn-sync-second| |
| 3873 | 3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there. |
| 3874 | |:syn-sync-third| |
| 3875 | 4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on. |
| 3876 | |:syn-sync-fourth| |
| 3877 | |
| 3878 | *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines* |
| 3879 | For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is |
| 3880 | limited by "minlines" and "maxlines". |
| 3881 | |
| 3882 | If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least |
| 3883 | that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few |
| 3884 | lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing. |
| 3885 | |
| 3886 | If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched |
| 3887 | for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after |
| 3888 | adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a |
| 3889 | slow machine. Example: > |
| 3890 | :syntax sync ccomment maxlines=500 |
| 3891 | < |
| 3892 | *:syn-sync-linebreaks* |
| 3893 | When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may |
| 3894 | cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to |
| 3895 | start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with |
| 3896 | the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line |
| 3897 | break use this: > |
| 3898 | :syntax sync linebreaks=1 |
| 3899 | The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a |
| 3900 | change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the |
| 3901 | value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks". |
| 3902 | |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 | First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first* |
| 3905 | > |
| 3906 | :syntax sync fromstart |
| 3907 | |
| 3908 | The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting |
| 3909 | accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text, |
| 3910 | so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However, |
Bram Moolenaar | f1568ec | 2011-12-14 21:17:39 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 3911 | when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3912 | case: to the end of the file). |
| 3913 | |
| 3914 | Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number. |
| 3915 | |
| 3916 | |
| 3917 | Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment* |
| 3918 | |
| 3919 | For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given. |
| 3920 | Example: > |
| 3921 | :syntax sync ccomment |
| 3922 | |
| 3923 | When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style |
| 3924 | comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be |
| 3925 | used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"! |
| 3926 | An alternate group name can be specified, for example: > |
| 3927 | :syntax sync ccomment javaComment |
| 3928 | This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be |
| 3929 | used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that |
| 3930 | region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/". |
| 3931 | |
| 3932 | The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of |
| 3933 | lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of |
| 3934 | lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few |
| 3935 | lines, but it hard to sync on). |
| 3936 | |
| 3937 | Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used |
| 3938 | that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line |
| 3939 | is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the |
| 3940 | chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction |
| 3941 | is hardly ever noticed. |
| 3942 | |
| 3943 | |
| 3944 | Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third* |
| 3945 | |
| 3946 | For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given. |
| 3947 | Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This |
| 3948 | means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower. |
| 3949 | Example: > |
| 3950 | :syntax sync minlines=50 |
| 3951 | |
| 3952 | "lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions). |
| 3953 | |
| 3954 | |
| 3955 | Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth* |
| 3956 | |
| 3957 | The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a |
| 3958 | sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some |
| 3959 | region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search |
| 3960 | starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there |
| 3961 | the search continues backwards in the file. |
| 3962 | |
| 3963 | This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained |
| 3964 | matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences: |
| 3965 | - Keywords cannot be used. |
| 3966 | - The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group |
| 3967 | of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups. |
| 3968 | - The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of |
| 3969 | forwards. |
| 3970 | - A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group |
| 3971 | of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the |
| 3972 | search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the |
| 3973 | consecutive that contain the continuation pattern. |
| 3974 | - When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or |
| 3975 | group of continued lines). |
| 3976 | - When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of |
| 3977 | continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the |
| 3978 | line (or group of continued lines). |
| 3979 | - When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of |
| 3980 | continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used. |
| 3981 | This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region |
| 3982 | (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used). |
| 3983 | |
| 3984 | There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used: |
| 3985 | 1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the |
| 3986 | search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected |
| 3987 | to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions |
| 3988 | that cross lines cannot contain other regions. |
| 3989 | 2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group |
| 3990 | that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified. |
| 3991 | This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much |
| 3992 | slower, because more text needs to be parsed. |
| 3993 | Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time. |
| 3994 | |
| 3995 | Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to |
| 3996 | avoid finding unwanted matches. |
| 3997 | |
| 3998 | [The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the |
| 3999 | search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the |
| 4000 | highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much) |
| 4001 | faster.] |
| 4002 | |
| 4003 | *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394* |
| 4004 | :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" .. |
| 4005 | |
| 4006 | Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the |
| 4007 | name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing |
| 4008 | of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region |
| 4009 | must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used. |
| 4010 | "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match. |
| 4011 | |
| 4012 | *syn-sync-groupthere* |
| 4013 | :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" .. |
| 4014 | |
| 4015 | Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that |
| 4016 | is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync |
| 4017 | point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync |
| 4018 | pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting. |
| 4019 | For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If |
| 4020 | "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the |
| 4021 | "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you |
| 4022 | are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice |
| 4023 | it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear |
| 4024 | inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...). |
| 4025 | |
| 4026 | :syntax sync match .. |
| 4027 | :syntax sync region .. |
| 4028 | |
| 4029 | Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is |
| 4030 | skipped while searching for a sync point. |
| 4031 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4032 | *syn-sync-linecont* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4033 | :syntax sync linecont {pattern} |
| 4034 | |
| 4035 | When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in |
| 4036 | the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will |
| 4037 | consider the lines to be concatenated. |
| 4038 | |
| 4039 | If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are |
| 4040 | searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very |
| 4041 | few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > |
| 4042 | :syntax sync maxlines=100 |
| 4043 | |
| 4044 | You can clear all sync settings with: > |
| 4045 | :syntax sync clear |
| 4046 | |
| 4047 | You can clear specific sync patterns with: > |
| 4048 | :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} .. |
| 4049 | |
| 4050 | ============================================================================== |
| 4051 | 11. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list* |
| 4052 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 482aaeb | 2005-09-29 18:26:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4053 | This command lists all the syntax items: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4054 | |
| 4055 | :sy[ntax] [list] |
| 4056 | |
| 4057 | To show the syntax items for one syntax group: > |
| 4058 | |
| 4059 | :sy[ntax] list {group-name} |
| 4060 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 24ea3ba | 2010-09-19 19:01:21 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4061 | To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4062 | |
| 4063 | :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name} |
| 4064 | |
| 4065 | See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command. |
| 4066 | |
| 4067 | Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn" |
| 4068 | is mostly used, because it looks better. |
| 4069 | |
| 4070 | ============================================================================== |
| 4071 | 12. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415* |
| 4072 | |
| 4073 | There are three types of highlight groups: |
| 4074 | - The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the |
| 4075 | name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are |
| 4076 | linked to a group of the second type. |
| 4077 | - The ones used for all syntax languages. |
| 4078 | - The ones used for the 'highlight' option. |
| 4079 | *hitest.vim* |
| 4080 | You can see all the groups currently active with this command: > |
| 4081 | :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim |
| 4082 | This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed |
| 4083 | in their own color. |
| 4084 | |
| 4085 | *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185* |
Bram Moolenaar | 00a927d | 2010-05-14 23:24:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4086 | :colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme. |
| 4087 | This is basically the same as > |
| 4088 | :echo g:colors_name |
| 4089 | < In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will |
| 4090 | output "default". When compiled without the |+eval| |
| 4091 | feature it will output "unknown". |
| 4092 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4093 | :colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' |
| 4094 | for the file "colors/{name}.vim. The first one that |
| 4095 | is found is loaded. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 4096 | To see the name of the currently active color scheme: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 00a927d | 2010-05-14 23:24:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4097 | :colo |
| 4098 | < The name is also stored in the g:colors_name variable. |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 4099 | Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4100 | ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. |
Bram Moolenaar | cfbc5ee | 2004-07-02 15:38:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4101 | After the color scheme has been loaded the |
| 4102 | |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4103 | For info about writing a colorscheme file: > |
| 4104 | :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4105 | |
| 4106 | :hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have |
| 4107 | attributes set. |
| 4108 | |
| 4109 | :hi[ghlight] {group-name} |
| 4110 | List one highlight group. |
| 4111 | |
| 4112 | :hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all |
| 4113 | highlighting for groups added by the user! |
| 4114 | Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which |
| 4115 | default colors to use. |
| 4116 | |
| 4117 | :hi[ghlight] clear {group-name} |
| 4118 | :hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE |
| 4119 | Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It |
| 4120 | is _not_ set back to the default colors. |
| 4121 | |
| 4122 | :hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} .. |
| 4123 | Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for |
| 4124 | an existing group. |
| 4125 | See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments. |
| 4126 | See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default] |
| 4127 | argument. |
| 4128 | |
| 4129 | Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the |
| 4130 | default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional |
| 4131 | highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default |
| 4132 | values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to |
| 4133 | the default value. |
| 4134 | |
| 4135 | A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads |
| 4136 | a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: > |
| 4137 | |
| 4138 | :hi Comment gui=bold |
| 4139 | |
| 4140 | Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the |
| 4141 | specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the |
| 4142 | result is like this single command has been used: > |
| 4143 | :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold |
| 4144 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4145 | *:highlight-verbose* |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4146 | When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will |
| 4147 | also tell where it was last set. Example: > |
| 4148 | :verbose hi Comment |
| 4149 | < Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4150 | Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4151 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8aff23a | 2005-08-19 20:40:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4152 | When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be |
| 4153 | mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4154 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4155 | *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423* |
| 4156 | There are three types of terminals for highlighting: |
| 4157 | term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm) |
| 4158 | cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co" |
| 4159 | termcap entry) |
| 4160 | gui the GUI |
| 4161 | |
| 4162 | For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use |
| 4163 | the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting. |
| 4164 | |
| 4165 | 1. highlight arguments for normal terminals |
| 4166 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 75c50c4 | 2005-06-04 22:06:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4167 | *bold* *underline* *undercurl* |
| 4168 | *inverse* *italic* *standout* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4169 | term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418* |
| 4170 | attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the |
| 4171 | following items (in any order): |
| 4172 | bold |
| 4173 | underline |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4174 | undercurl not always available |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4175 | reverse |
| 4176 | inverse same as reverse |
| 4177 | italic |
| 4178 | standout |
| 4179 | NONE no attributes used (used to reset it) |
| 4180 | |
| 4181 | Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They |
| 4182 | have the same effect. |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4183 | "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible |
| 4184 | then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" is only available in |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4185 | the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4186 | |
| 4187 | start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422* |
| 4188 | stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop* |
| 4189 | These lists of terminal codes can be used to get |
| 4190 | non-standard attributes on a terminal. |
| 4191 | |
| 4192 | The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument |
| 4193 | is written before the characters in the highlighted |
| 4194 | area. It can be anything that you want to send to the |
| 4195 | terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence |
| 4196 | specified with the "stop" argument is written after the |
| 4197 | highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument. |
| 4198 | Otherwise the screen will look messed up. |
| 4199 | |
| 4200 | The {term-list} can have two forms: |
| 4201 | |
| 4202 | 1. A string with escape sequences. |
| 4203 | This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with |
| 4204 | "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized |
| 4205 | here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example: |
| 4206 | start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r; |
| 4207 | |
| 4208 | 2. A list of terminal codes. |
| 4209 | Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of |
| 4210 | the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas. |
| 4211 | White space is not allowed. Example: |
| 4212 | start=t_C1,t_BL |
| 4213 | The terminal codes must exist for this to work. |
| 4214 | |
| 4215 | |
| 4216 | 2. highlight arguments for color terminals |
| 4217 | |
| 4218 | cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm* |
| 4219 | See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|. |
| 4220 | The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when |
| 4221 | colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could |
| 4222 | be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue. |
| 4223 | Note: Many terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes |
| 4224 | with coloring. Use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" OR "ctermbg=". |
| 4225 | |
| 4226 | ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421* |
| 4227 | ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg* |
| 4228 | The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to |
| 4229 | (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co". |
| 4230 | The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal |
| 4231 | and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of |
| 4232 | "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives |
| 4233 | another color, on others you just get color 3. |
| 4234 | |
| 4235 | For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit |
| 4236 | unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The |
| 4237 | colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file. |
| 4238 | Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors |
| 4239 | for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms. |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 | The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these |
| 4242 | have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11 |
| 4243 | are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the |
| 4244 | highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The |
| 4245 | following names are recognized, with the color number used: |
| 4246 | |
| 4247 | *cterm-colors* |
| 4248 | NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~ |
| 4249 | 0 0 Black |
| 4250 | 1 4 DarkBlue |
| 4251 | 2 2 DarkGreen |
| 4252 | 3 6 DarkCyan |
| 4253 | 4 1 DarkRed |
| 4254 | 5 5 DarkMagenta |
| 4255 | 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow |
| 4256 | 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey |
| 4257 | 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey |
| 4258 | 9 4* Blue, LightBlue |
| 4259 | 10 2* Green, LightGreen |
| 4260 | 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan |
| 4261 | 12 1* Red, LightRed |
| 4262 | 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta |
| 4263 | 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow |
| 4264 | 15 7* White |
| 4265 | |
| 4266 | The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co' |
| 4267 | greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for |
| 4268 | 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the |
| 4269 | bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g., |
| 4270 | "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work |
| 4271 | for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed. |
| 4272 | If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a |
| 4273 | "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use |
| 4274 | a number instead of a color name. |
| 4275 | |
| 4276 | The case of the color names is ignored. |
| 4277 | Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4278 | numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4279 | is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc. |
| 4280 | |
| 4281 | Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong |
| 4282 | colors! |
| 4283 | |
| 4284 | *:hi-normal-cterm* |
| 4285 | When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group, |
| 4286 | these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text. |
| 4287 | Example: > |
| 4288 | :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue |
| 4289 | < When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the |
| 4290 | 'background' option will be adjusted automatically. This causes the |
| 4291 | highlight groups that depend on 'background' to change! This means |
| 4292 | you should set the colors for Normal first, before setting other |
| 4293 | colors. |
| 4294 | When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to |
| 4295 | be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First |
Bram Moolenaar | 8f3f58f | 2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100 | [diff] [blame] | 4296 | delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4297 | |
| 4298 | When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim |
| 4299 | needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" |
| 4300 | termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the |
| 4301 | 't_op' option in your .vimrc. |
| 4302 | *E419* *E420* |
| 4303 | When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and |
| 4304 | "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the |
| 4305 | colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for |
| 4306 | reverse video: > |
| 4307 | :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg |
| 4308 | < Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this |
| 4309 | command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the |
| 4310 | "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted. |
| 4311 | |
| 4312 | |
| 4313 | 3. highlight arguments for the GUI |
| 4314 | |
| 4315 | gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui* |
| 4316 | These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode. |
| 4317 | See |attr-list| for a description. |
| 4318 | Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They |
| 4319 | have the same effect. |
| 4320 | Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group. |
| 4321 | |
| 4322 | font={font-name} *highlight-font* |
| 4323 | font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim |
| 4324 | runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: > |
| 4325 | font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1 |
| 4326 | < |
| 4327 | The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font. |
| 4328 | When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default |
| 4329 | font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is |
| 4330 | used). |
| 4331 | The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs: |
| 4332 | When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed. |
| 4333 | When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be |
| 4334 | changed. |
| 4335 | All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same |
| 4336 | character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will |
| 4337 | occur. |
| 4338 | |
| 4339 | guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg* |
| 4340 | guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg* |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4341 | guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp* |
| 4342 | These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special |
Bram Moolenaar | 7df351e | 2006-01-23 22:30:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4343 | (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl. |
| 4344 | There are a few special names: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4345 | NONE no color (transparent) |
| 4346 | bg use normal background color |
| 4347 | background use normal background color |
| 4348 | fg use normal foreground color |
| 4349 | foreground use normal foreground color |
| 4350 | To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character, |
| 4351 | put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. |
| 4352 | Example: > |
| 4353 | :hi comment guifg='salmon pink' |
| 4354 | < |
| 4355 | *gui-colors* |
| 4356 | Suggested color names (these are available on most systems): |
| 4357 | Red LightRed DarkRed |
| 4358 | Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen |
| 4359 | Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue |
| 4360 | Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan |
| 4361 | Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta |
| 4362 | Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow |
| 4363 | Gray LightGray DarkGray |
| 4364 | Black White |
| 4365 | Orange Purple Violet |
| 4366 | |
| 4367 | In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See |
| 4368 | |win32-colors|. |
| 4369 | |
| 4370 | You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values. |
| 4371 | The format is "#rrggbb", where |
| 4372 | "rr" is the Red value |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4373 | "gg" is the Green value |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4374 | "bb" is the Blue value |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4375 | All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: > |
| 4376 | :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff |
| 4377 | < |
| 4378 | *highlight-groups* *highlight-default* |
| 4379 | These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the |
| 4380 | 'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value |
| 4381 | of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight" |
| 4382 | command. |
Bram Moolenaar | 1a38442 | 2010-07-14 19:53:30 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4383 | *hl-ColorColumn* |
| 4384 | ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn' |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4385 | *hl-Conceal* |
| 4386 | Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed |
| 4387 | text (see 'conceallevel') |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4388 | *hl-Cursor* |
| 4389 | Cursor the character under the cursor |
| 4390 | *hl-CursorIM* |
| 4391 | CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM| |
Bram Moolenaar | 5316eee | 2006-03-12 22:11:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4392 | *hl-CursorColumn* |
| 4393 | CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is |
| 4394 | set |
| 4395 | *hl-CursorLine* |
| 4396 | CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is |
| 4397 | set |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4398 | *hl-Directory* |
| 4399 | Directory directory names (and other special names in listings) |
| 4400 | *hl-DiffAdd* |
| 4401 | DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt| |
| 4402 | *hl-DiffChange* |
| 4403 | DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt| |
| 4404 | *hl-DiffDelete* |
| 4405 | DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt| |
| 4406 | *hl-DiffText* |
| 4407 | DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt| |
| 4408 | *hl-ErrorMsg* |
| 4409 | ErrorMsg error messages on the command line |
| 4410 | *hl-VertSplit* |
| 4411 | VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows |
| 4412 | *hl-Folded* |
| 4413 | Folded line used for closed folds |
| 4414 | *hl-FoldColumn* |
| 4415 | FoldColumn 'foldcolumn' |
| 4416 | *hl-SignColumn* |
| 4417 | SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed |
| 4418 | *hl-IncSearch* |
| 4419 | IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with |
| 4420 | ":s///c" |
| 4421 | *hl-LineNr* |
Bram Moolenaar | fd2ac76 | 2006-03-01 22:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4422 | LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' |
Bram Moolenaar | 6448667 | 2010-05-16 15:46:46 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4423 | or 'relativenumber' option is set. |
Bram Moolenaar | fd2ac76 | 2006-03-01 22:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4424 | *hl-MatchParen* |
| 4425 | MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it |
| 4426 | is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt| |
| 4427 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4428 | *hl-ModeMsg* |
| 4429 | ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --") |
| 4430 | *hl-MoreMsg* |
| 4431 | MoreMsg |more-prompt| |
| 4432 | *hl-NonText* |
| 4433 | NonText '~' and '@' at the end of the window, characters from |
| 4434 | 'showbreak' and other characters that do not really exist in |
| 4435 | the text (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character |
| 4436 | doesn't fit at the end of the line). |
| 4437 | *hl-Normal* |
| 4438 | Normal normal text |
Bram Moolenaar | 1c7715d | 2005-10-03 22:02:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4439 | *hl-Pmenu* |
| 4440 | Pmenu Popup menu: normal item. |
| 4441 | *hl-PmenuSel* |
| 4442 | PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item. |
| 4443 | *hl-PmenuSbar* |
| 4444 | PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar. |
| 4445 | *hl-PmenuThumb* |
| 4446 | PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4447 | *hl-Question* |
| 4448 | Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
| 4449 | *hl-Search* |
| 4450 | Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch'). |
| 4451 | Also used for highlighting the current line in the quickfix |
| 4452 | window and similar items that need to stand out. |
| 4453 | *hl-SpecialKey* |
| 4454 | SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used |
| 4455 | to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'. |
| 4456 | Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it |
| 4457 | really is. |
Bram Moolenaar | 217ad92 | 2005-03-20 22:37:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4458 | *hl-SpellBad* |
| 4459 | SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell| |
| 4460 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 53180ce | 2005-07-05 21:48:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4461 | *hl-SpellCap* |
| 4462 | SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell| |
| 4463 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 217ad92 | 2005-03-20 22:37:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4464 | *hl-SpellLocal* |
| 4465 | SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is |
| 4466 | used in another region. |spell| |
| 4467 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
| 4468 | *hl-SpellRare* |
| 4469 | SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is |
| 4470 | hardly ever used. |spell| |
| 4471 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4472 | *hl-StatusLine* |
| 4473 | StatusLine status line of current window |
| 4474 | *hl-StatusLineNC* |
| 4475 | StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows |
| 4476 | Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in |
| 4477 | the status line of the current window. |
Bram Moolenaar | faa959a | 2006-02-20 21:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4478 | *hl-TabLine* |
| 4479 | TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label |
| 4480 | *hl-TabLineFill* |
| 4481 | TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels |
| 4482 | *hl-TabLineSel* |
| 4483 | TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4484 | *hl-Title* |
| 4485 | Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. |
| 4486 | *hl-Visual* |
| 4487 | Visual Visual mode selection |
| 4488 | *hl-VisualNOS* |
| 4489 | VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection". |
| 4490 | Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this. |
| 4491 | *hl-WarningMsg* |
| 4492 | WarningMsg warning messages |
| 4493 | *hl-WildMenu* |
| 4494 | WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion |
| 4495 | |
Bram Moolenaar | f75a963 | 2005-09-13 21:20:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4496 | *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4497 | The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4498 | statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4499 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8c8de83 | 2008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4500 | For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4501 | scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the |
| 4502 | Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg, |
| 4503 | and guifg. |
| 4504 | |
| 4505 | *hl-Menu* |
| 4506 | Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus. |
| 4507 | Also used for the toolbar. |
| 4508 | Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. |
| 4509 | |
| 4510 | NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually |
| 4511 | specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is |
| 4512 | empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when |
| 4513 | set. |
| 4514 | |
| 4515 | *hl-Scrollbar* |
| 4516 | Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's |
| 4517 | scrollbars. |
| 4518 | Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg. |
| 4519 | |
| 4520 | *hl-Tooltip* |
| 4521 | Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips. |
| 4522 | Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. |
| 4523 | |
| 4524 | NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually |
| 4525 | specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is |
| 4526 | empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when |
| 4527 | set. |
| 4528 | |
| 4529 | ============================================================================== |
| 4530 | 13. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413* |
| 4531 | |
| 4532 | When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you |
| 4533 | can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight |
| 4534 | group, and give the color attributes only for that group. |
| 4535 | |
| 4536 | To set a link: |
| 4537 | |
| 4538 | :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group} |
| 4539 | |
| 4540 | To remove a link: |
| 4541 | |
| 4542 | :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE |
| 4543 | |
| 4544 | Notes: *E414* |
| 4545 | - If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You |
| 4546 | don't get an error message for a non-existing group. |
| 4547 | - As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is |
| 4548 | removed. |
| 4549 | - If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is |
| 4550 | not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a |
| 4551 | sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip |
| 4552 | links for groups that already have settings. |
| 4553 | |
| 4554 | *:hi-default* *:highlight-default* |
| 4555 | The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a |
| 4556 | group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command |
| 4557 | will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link. |
| 4558 | |
| 4559 | Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a |
| 4560 | specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: > |
| 4561 | :highlight default link cComment Comment |
| 4562 | If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: > |
| 4563 | :highlight link cComment Question |
| 4564 | Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be |
| 4565 | overruled when the syntax file is loaded. |
| 4566 | |
| 4567 | ============================================================================== |
| 4568 | 14. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391* |
| 4569 | |
| 4570 | If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this |
| 4571 | command: > |
| 4572 | :syntax clear |
| 4573 | |
| 4574 | This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting, |
| 4575 | or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed |
| 4576 | in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that |
| 4577 | load the syntax file. |
| 4578 | The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is |
| 4579 | loaded after this command. |
| 4580 | |
| 4581 | If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove |
| 4582 | the autocommands that load the syntax files: > |
| 4583 | :syntax off |
| 4584 | |
| 4585 | What this command actually does, is executing the command > |
| 4586 | :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 4587 | See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work |
| 4588 | $VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|. |
| 4589 | |
| 4590 | To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: > |
| 4591 | :syntax clear {group-name} .. |
| 4592 | This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}. |
| 4593 | |
| 4594 | To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: > |
| 4595 | :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} .. |
| 4596 | This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list. |
| 4597 | |
| 4598 | *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset* |
| 4599 | If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the |
| 4600 | defaults back: > |
| 4601 | |
| 4602 | :syntax reset |
| 4603 | |
| 4604 | This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option. |
| 4605 | |
| 4606 | Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset |
| 4607 | back to their Vim default. |
| 4608 | Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color |
| 4609 | scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost. |
| 4610 | |
| 4611 | What this actually does is: > |
| 4612 | |
| 4613 | let g:syntax_cmd = "reset" |
| 4614 | runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim |
| 4615 | |
| 4616 | Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option. |
| 4617 | |
| 4618 | *syncolor* |
| 4619 | If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim |
| 4620 | script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in |
| 4621 | 'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule |
| 4622 | the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax |
| 4623 | reset" command. |
| 4624 | |
| 4625 | For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: > |
| 4626 | |
| 4627 | if &background == "light" |
| 4628 | highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen |
| 4629 | else |
| 4630 | highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green |
| 4631 | endif |
| 4632 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c0197e2 | 2004-09-13 20:26:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4633 | *E679* |
| 4634 | Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the |
| 4635 | 'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an |
| 4636 | endless loop. |
| 4637 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4638 | Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether |
| 4639 | your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This |
| 4640 | depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|. |
| 4641 | |
| 4642 | *syntax_cmd* |
| 4643 | The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the |
| 4644 | syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded: |
| 4645 | "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but |
| 4646 | links are kept |
| 4647 | "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that |
| 4648 | don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default". |
| 4649 | "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all |
| 4650 | the colors. |
| 4651 | "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a |
| 4652 | syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set |
| 4653 | them. |
| 4654 | |
| 4655 | ============================================================================== |
| 4656 | 15. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight* |
| 4657 | |
| 4658 | If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following |
| 4659 | mappings. |
| 4660 | |
| 4661 | <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags. |
| 4662 | <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file. |
| 4663 | > |
| 4664 | :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12> |
| 4665 | :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR> |
| 4666 | |
| 4667 | WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more |
| 4668 | memory Vim will consume. |
| 4669 | |
| 4670 | Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you |
| 4671 | must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net). |
| 4672 | |
| 4673 | Put these lines in your Makefile: |
| 4674 | |
| 4675 | # Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk |
| 4676 | types: types.vim |
| 4677 | types.vim: *.[ch] |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4678 | ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4679 | awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\ |
| 4680 | {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@ |
| 4681 | |
| 4682 | And put these lines in your .vimrc: > |
| 4683 | |
| 4684 | " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists |
| 4685 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim' |
| 4686 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname) |
| 4687 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname |
| 4688 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif |
| 4689 | |
| 4690 | ============================================================================== |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4691 | 16. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax* |
| 4692 | |
| 4693 | Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is |
| 4694 | possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own |
| 4695 | private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source |
| 4696 | with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source |
| 4697 | highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold, |
| 4698 | italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here. |
| 4699 | |
| 4700 | To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other |
| 4701 | windows on the buffer: > |
| 4702 | :ownsyntax foo |
Bram Moolenaar | debe25a | 2010-06-06 17:41:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4703 | < *w:current_syntax* |
| 4704 | This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of |
| 4705 | "b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and |
| 4706 | restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set |
| 4707 | "b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to |
| 4708 | "w:current_syntax". |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4709 | |
| 4710 | Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows |
| 4711 | on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely, |
| 4712 | syntax commands executed from that window do not effect other windows on the |
| 4713 | same buffer. |
| 4714 | |
Bram Moolenaar | debe25a | 2010-06-06 17:41:24 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4715 | A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer |
| 4716 | is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded. |
| 4717 | When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax. |
Bram Moolenaar | 860cae1 | 2010-06-05 23:22:07 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4718 | |
| 4719 | ============================================================================== |
Bram Moolenaar | 24ea3ba | 2010-09-19 19:01:21 +0200 | [diff] [blame] | 4720 | 17. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4721 | |
| 4722 | Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the |
| 4723 | default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: > |
| 4724 | :if &term =~ "xterm" |
| 4725 | : if has("terminfo") |
| 4726 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4727 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm |
| 4728 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm |
| 4729 | : else |
| 4730 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4731 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm |
| 4732 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm |
| 4733 | : endif |
| 4734 | :endif |
| 4735 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4736 | |
| 4737 | You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal, |
| 4738 | e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm". |
| 4739 | |
| 4740 | Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may |
| 4741 | be wrong. |
| 4742 | *xiterm* *rxvt* |
| 4743 | The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too. |
| 4744 | But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: > |
| 4745 | :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm |
| 4746 | :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm |
| 4747 | < |
| 4748 | *colortest.vim* |
| 4749 | To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution. |
Bram Moolenaar | f740b29 | 2006-02-16 22:11:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4750 | To use it, execute this command: > |
| 4751 | :runtime syntax/colortest.vim |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4752 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4753 | Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4754 | output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined |
| 4755 | at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground |
| 4756 | colors, when 't_Co' is 8. |
| 4757 | |
| 4758 | *xfree-xterm* |
| 4759 | To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4760 | included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4761 | at: > |
| 4762 | http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html |
| 4763 | Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the |
| 4764 | termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it |
| 4765 | supports. > |
| 4766 | ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query |
| 4767 | If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings. |
| 4768 | (Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding). |
| 4769 | |
| 4770 | This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): > |
| 4771 | :if has("terminfo") |
| 4772 | : set t_Co=16 |
| 4773 | : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm |
| 4774 | : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm |
| 4775 | :else |
| 4776 | : set t_Co=16 |
| 4777 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm |
| 4778 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm |
| 4779 | :endif |
| 4780 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4781 | |
| 4782 | Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically |
| 4783 | translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm". |
| 4784 | Colors above 16 are also translated automatically. |
| 4785 | |
| 4786 | For 256 colors this has been reported to work: > |
| 4787 | |
| 4788 | :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm |
| 4789 | :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm |
| 4790 | |
| 4791 | Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color" |
| 4792 | and try if that works. |
| 4793 | |
| 4794 | You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file): |
| 4795 | XTerm*color0: #000000 |
| 4796 | XTerm*color1: #c00000 |
| 4797 | XTerm*color2: #008000 |
| 4798 | XTerm*color3: #808000 |
| 4799 | XTerm*color4: #0000c0 |
| 4800 | XTerm*color5: #c000c0 |
| 4801 | XTerm*color6: #008080 |
| 4802 | XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0 |
| 4803 | XTerm*color8: #808080 |
| 4804 | XTerm*color9: #ff6060 |
| 4805 | XTerm*color10: #00ff00 |
| 4806 | XTerm*color11: #ffff00 |
| 4807 | XTerm*color12: #8080ff |
| 4808 | XTerm*color13: #ff40ff |
| 4809 | XTerm*color14: #00ffff |
| 4810 | XTerm*color15: #ffffff |
| 4811 | Xterm*cursorColor: Black |
| 4812 | |
| 4813 | [Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the |
| 4814 | cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4815 | newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4816 | |
| 4817 | To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database |
| 4818 | Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): > |
| 4819 | xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults |
| 4820 | < |
| 4821 | *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor* |
| 4822 | To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas |
| 4823 | Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with |
| 4824 | these resources: |
| 4825 | XTerm*cursorBlink: on |
| 4826 | XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400 |
| 4827 | XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250 |
| 4828 | XTerm*cursorColor: White |
| 4829 | |
| 4830 | *hpterm-color* |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4831 | These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4832 | foreground colors: > |
| 4833 | :if has("terminfo") |
| 4834 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4835 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS |
| 4836 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S |
| 4837 | :else |
| 4838 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4839 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS |
| 4840 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S |
| 4841 | :endif |
| 4842 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4843 | |
| 4844 | *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal* |
| 4845 | These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal |
| 4846 | emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the |
| 4847 | bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. > |
| 4848 | :set t_Co=16 |
| 4849 | :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m |
| 4850 | :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m |
| 4851 | < |
| 4852 | *TTpro-telnet* |
| 4853 | These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware / |
| 4854 | open-source program for MS-Windows. > |
| 4855 | set t_Co=16 |
| 4856 | set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm |
| 4857 | set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm |
| 4858 | Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure |
| 4859 | that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled. |
| 4860 | (info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>) |
| 4861 | |
| 4862 | vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |